2020.01.13 Guide Line File - BHTC-2 PDF

CONSTRUCTION GUIDE LINE
Prepared by
VITTI Sthapati Brindo Ltd.
27/A Sangshad Avenue
Monipuripara, Dhaka -1215
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 01: GENERAL GUIDE LINE, MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS & SAFETY

SECURITY MEASURES ...................................................................................... 15
GENERAL GUIDE LINE, MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS & SAFETY SECURITY MEASURES ................. 17
GENERAL GUIDE LINE AND MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................... 17
1. GENERAL PROVISIONS ......................................................................................................... 17
2. TAKING OVER POSSESSION OF SITE ..................................................................................... 19
3. MOBILIZATION ...................................................................................................................... 19
4. CLEANING OF SITE ............................................................................................................... 19
5. TEMPORARY FACILITIES ....................................................................................................... 20
6. PROTECTION AND SAFETY.................................................................................................... 22
7. MATERIALS, TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT .................................................................................. 22
8. PREPARATION OF SITE ......................................................................................................... 23
9. SAMPLES & TESTS ............................................................................................................... 24
10. TEST TO BE PERFOMED .................................................................................................... 25
11. FINE AGGREGATES (SAND) ............................................................................................... 25
12. COARSE AGGREGATES ..................................................................................................... 26
13. CEMENT ........................................................................................................................... 28
14. WHITE CEMENT ................................................................................................................ 29
15. BRICKS ............................................................................................................................ 30
16. BRICK CHIPS (Khoa) ......................................................................................................... 32
17. STONE CHIPS/COARSE AGGREGATES............................................................................... 32
18. REINFORCING STEEL ........................................................................................................ 35
19. WATER ............................................................................................................................. 40
20. ADMIXTURE:..................................................................................................................... 40
21. LIME................................................................................................................................. 41
22. MARBLE ........................................................................................................................... 41
23. TIMBER ............................................................................................................................ 41
24. GLASS.............................................................................................................................. 42
25. WIRE GAUGE .................................................................................................................... 42
26. PAINTS AND PROTECTIVE MATERIALS ............................................................................. 43
27. ALUMINUM MEMBERS...................................................................................................... 44
28. STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR DOORS AND WINDOWS ............................................................ 44
29. M.S. PIPES ....................................................................................................................... 44
30. PVC PIPES ....................................................................................................................... 44
ANNEXURE – A: SAFETY AND SECURITY MEASURES GUIDELINE .................................................... 45
1. Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 45
2. Safety Training ...................................................................................................................... 45
3. Preparatory Meetings and Safety Inspections.......................................................................... 45
4. Safety Compliance Monitoring ............................................................................................... 45
5. Accident Reporting ................................................................................................................ 45
6. Medical Support Facility......................................................................................................... 46
7. Scaffolding Monitoring: ......................................................................................................... 46
8. Safety Equipment Or Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) ...................................................... 46
9. Safety Procedures ................................................................................................................. 46
10. Safety Check lists .............................................................................................................. 49
CHAPTER 02: CIVIL WORKS ................................................................................... 59

2.1. EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION .............................................................................................. 61
2.1.1. Description ................................................................................................................... 61
2.1.2. Construction Requirements ............................................................................................ 61
2.1.3. Applicable standards: .................................................................................................... 62
2.1.4. Materials: ...................................................................................................................... 62
2.1.5. Inspection and testing.................................................................................................... 63
2.1.6. Weather Conditions ....................................................................................................... 63
2.1.7. Soil Materials ................................................................................................................ 63
2.1.8. Stakes And Grades ........................................................................................................ 64
2.1.9. Excavation .................................................................................................................... 64
2.2. TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES .................................................................... 65
2.2.1. Trenching ..................................................................................................................... 65
2.2.2. Back-filling .................................................................................................................... 66
2.2.3. Compacted Fill .............................................................................................................. 66
2.2.4. Common fill .................................................................................................................. 66
2.2.5. Back filling .................................................................................................................... 67
2.2.6. Method of Measurement ................................................................................................ 67
2.2.7. Basis of Payment .......................................................................................................... 67
2.3. PILE FOUNDATION WORKS (CAST-IN-SITU)......................................................................... 68
2.3.1. General: ........................................................................................................................ 68
2.4. WATER PROOFING POLYTHENE SHEET ................................................................................ 78
2.4.1. Description ................................................................................................................... 78
2.4.2. Construction Requirement ............................................................................................. 79
2.4.4. Basis of Payment .......................................................................................................... 79
2.5. WATER PROOFING with FORMDEX PLUS CEMENTITIOUS CAPILLARY WATERPROOFING .... 79
2.5.1. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 79
2.5.2. SURFACE PREPARATION .............................................................................................. 79
2.5.3. MIXING OF FORMDEX PLUS .......................................................................................... 80
2.5.4. FORMDEX SLURRY APPLICATION ................................................................................. 80
2.5.5. FORMDEX DRY SPRINKLING APPLICATION.................................................................... 80
2.5.6. FORMDEX APPLICATION TO JOINTS .............................................................................. 80
2.5.7. CURING AND PROTECTION FORMDEX TREATED SURFACES .......................................... 81
2.5.8. REFERENCES................................................................................................................ 81
2.5.10. Basis of Payment .......................................................................................................... 81
2.6. CONCRETE ........................................................................................................................... 82
2.6.1. Description ................................................................................................................... 82
2.6.2. Construction Requirements ............................................................................................ 82
2.6.3. Composition of Concrete ............................................................................................... 82
2.6.4. BATCHING .................................................................................................................... 84
2.6.5. MIXING ......................................................................................................................... 85
2.6.6. 6.6 CONSISTENCY OF CONCRETE ................................................................................. 86
2.6.7. TRANSPORT AND PLACING .......................................................................................... 86
2.6.8. Compaction of Concrete ................................................................................................ 87
2.6.9. Concrete Construction ................................................................................................... 87
2.6.10. Sampling of Plastic Concrete ......................................................................................... 88
2.6.11. Control Tests for Concrete ............................................................................................. 89
2.6.12. Rejection of Plastic Concrete ......................................................................................... 89
2.6.13. Curing and Protection .................................................................................................... 90
2.6.14. Loading ........................................................................................................................ 90
2.6.15. Tolerance for Concrete Surfaces .................................................................................... 90
2.6.16. Concreting in High Ambient Temperature ........................................................................ 91
2.7. FORM WORK ........................................................................................................................ 91
2.7.1. SCOPE OF WORK .......................................................................................................... 91
2.7.2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS ............................................................................................ 91
2.7.3. MATERIALS .................................................................................................................. 91
2.7.4. DESIGN OF FORMWORK ............................................................................................... 92
2.7.5. Removal of Forms ......................................................................................................... 93
2.7.6. Surface Finish and Remedial .......................................................................................... 93
2.7.7. Treatment of Surfaces ................................................................................................... 93
2.7.8. Grout Cleaning .............................................................................................................. 94
2.7.9. Rubbed Finish ............................................................................................................... 94
2.7.11. Basis of Payment .......................................................................................................... 95
2.8. PVC WATER STOPPER ......................................................................................................... 95
2.8.1. General ......................................................................................................................... 95
2.8.2. Workmanship................................................................................................................ 95
2.8.4. Mode of Payment .......................................................................................................... 96
2.9. REINFORCEMENT ................................................................................................................. 96
2.9.1. General ......................................................................................................................... 96
2.9.2. Material ........................................................................................................................ 96
2.9.3. Bending of Reinforcement.............................................................................................. 96
2.9.4. Placing of Reinforcement ............................................................................................... 97
2.9.5. Spacing of Reinforcement .............................................................................................. 97
2.9.6. Support of Reinforcement .............................................................................................. 98
2.9.7. Protective Coating ......................................................................................................... 98
2.9.8. Storage and Care........................................................................................................... 98
2.9.9. Tolerances for reinforcing steel: ..................................................................................... 98
2.9.10. Inspection ..................................................................................................................... 98
2.9.12. Basis of Payment .......................................................................................................... 99
2.10. RE-BAR Welding .............................................................................................................. 99
2.10.1. Description ................................................................................................................... 99
2.10.2. Construction Requirement ............................................................................................. 99
2.10.4. Basis of Payment .......................................................................................................... 99
2.11. STRUCTURAL STEELWORK .............................................................................................. 99
2.11.1. General ......................................................................................................................... 99
2.11.2. Scope of Work ............................................................................................................ 100
2.11.3. Shop Drawing and Dimensions .................................................................................... 100
2.11.4. Materials ..................................................................................................................... 100
2.11.5. Shop Drawings............................................................................................................ 101
2.11.6. Fabrication .................................................................................................................. 101
2.11.7. Welding ...................................................................................................................... 103
2.11.8. Bolting ........................................................................................................................ 104
2.11.9. Delivery ...................................................................................................................... 104
2.11.10. Erection .................................................................................................................. 104
2.11.11. Protective Coatings ................................................................................................. 105
2.11.12. Method of Measurement .......................................................................................... 107
2.12. BRICK FLAT SOLING ...................................................................................................... 107
2.12.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 107
2.12.2. Construction Requirements .......................................................................................... 107
2.12.3. Method of Measurement .............................................................................................. 107
2.12.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 107
2.13. BRICK ON EDGE PAVEMENT ........................................................................................... 107
2.13.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 107
2.13.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 108
2.14. BRICK WORK (250 MM OR MORE THICK)....................................................................... 108
2.14.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 108
2.14.3. Workmanship.............................................................................................................. 109
2.14.5. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 109
2.15. BRICK WORK (75 to 125 mm thick) ................................................................................ 109
2.15.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 109
2.15.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 110
2.16. MACHINEMADE CERAMIC BRICK WORK......................................................................... 110
2.16.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 110
2.16.2. Workmanship.............................................................................................................. 110
2.16.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 110
2.17. 12 MM THICK CEMENT PLASTER ................................................................................... 110
2.17.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 110
2.17.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 111
2.18. 12MM THICK PLASTER WITH NEAT CEMENT FINISH ..................................................... 112
2.18.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 112
2.18.2. Construction Requirement ........................................................................................... 112
2.18.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 112
2.19. PLASTER TO R.C.C. SURFACE ........................................................................................ 112
2.19.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 112
2.19.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 112
2.20. ARTIFICIAL PATENT STONE FLOORING .......................................................................... 112
2.20.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 112
2.21. WOOD WORK (DOOR FRAME AND SHUTTER)................................................................. 113
2.21.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 113
2.21.2. Shop Drawings............................................................................................................ 113
2.21.3. Samples ..................................................................................................................... 113
2.21.4. Materials ..................................................................................................................... 114
2.21.5. Fabrication .................................................................................................................. 115
2.21.7. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 116
2.22. VENEERED PARTEX FIXED PANEL .................................................................................. 116
2.22.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 116
2.22.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 116
2.23. Door Lock....................................................................................................................... 116
2.23.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 116
2.23.3. Method of Measurements ............................................................................................ 116
2.23.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 116
2.24. HATCH BOLT .................................................................................................................. 117
2.24.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 117
2.24.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 117
2.25. MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORK .................................................................................... 117
2.25.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 117
2.25.2. Shop Drawings............................................................................................................ 117
2.25.3. Materials ..................................................................................................................... 117
2.25.4. Concrete and Masonry ANCHORS: ............................................................................... 118
2.25.5. Welded Connections.................................................................................................... 118
2.25.6. Shop Cleaning and Painting ......................................................................................... 119
2.25.7. Installation .................................................................................................................. 119
2.25.8. Painting ...................................................................................................................... 120
2.25.10. Basis of Payment .................................................................................................... 120
2.26. ALUMINIMUM DOORS, WINDOWS, CURTAIN WALLS, CURTAIN RAILS,ETC. .................. 120
2.26.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 120
2.26.2. Materials and Products ................................................................................................ 120
2.26.3. Shop Drawings............................................................................................................ 122
2.26.4. Installation .................................................................................................................. 122
2.26.6. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 122
2.27. FALSE CEILING (GYPSUM BOARD)................................................................................. 122
2.27.1. Description ................................................................................................................. 122
2.27.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 123
CHAPTER 03: SANITARY, PLUMBING AND GAS LINE WORKS............................... 125

3.A. PLUMBING.............................................................................................................................. 127
3.1. GENERAL ........................................................................................................................... 127
3.2. G.I. PIPE : .......................................................................................................................... 127
3.3. VALVE AND FITTING........................................................................................................... 128
3.3.1. Gate Valve................................................................................................................... 128
3.3.2. Globe Valve ................................................................................................................. 128
3.3.3. Check VALVE .............................................................................................................. 128
3.3.4. STRAINER: ................................................................................................................. 128
3.3.5. Pressure Reducing Valve ............................................................................................. 129
3.3.6. Automatic Vent Valve................................................................................................... 129
3.4. PRESSURE GAUGE ............................................................................................................. 129
3.5. FOOT VALVE ...................................................................................................................... 129
3.6. uPVC PIPE & PIPE FITTING ............................................................................................... 130
3.6.1. Y-Joint ........................................................................................................................ 131
3.6.2. T-Joint ........................................................................................................................ 131
3.6.3. P-Trap ........................................................................................................................ 131
3.6.4. Bend ........................................................................................................................... 131
3.6.5. Door Bend .................................................................................................................. 131
3.6.6. Offset Bend ................................................................................................................. 131
3.6.7. Vent Cowl ................................................................................................................... 131
3.6.8. Loose Socket .............................................................................................................. 131
3.7. R.C.C. PIPE ........................................................................................................................ 132
3.8. TOILET/KITCHEN ROOM FITTINGS..................................................................................... 133
3.8.1. Stop Cock ................................................................................................................... 133
3.8.2. Angle Cock ................................................................................................................. 133
3.8.3. Open Tap .................................................................................................................... 133
3.8.4. Cool Pillar Cock........................................................................................................... 134
3.8.5. Basin Mixture .............................................................................................................. 134
3.8.6. Shower Mixture ........................................................................................................... 134
3.8.7. Kitchen Sink Mixture .................................................................................................... 134
3.8.8. Kitchen Room Sink Cock ............................................................................................. 134
3.8.9. Bottle Trap .................................................................................................................. 135
3.8.10. Washing Hand Basin ................................................................................................... 135
3.8.11. Kitchen Sink ................................................................................................................ 135
3.8.12. Pedestal...................................................................................................................... 135
3.8.13. Flexible Connection ..................................................................................................... 135
3.8.14. Automatic Shop Dispenser........................................................................................... 135
3.8.15. Automatic Hand Dryer ................................................................................................. 136
3.8.16. New Madera Commode (Combi) .................................................................................. 136
3.8.17. American Squat (Long pan) ......................................................................................... 136
3.8.18. Standing Urinal (Vacuum Break)................................................................................... 136
3.8.19. Shower Assembly ....................................................................................................... 137
3.8.20. Glass Mirror ................................................................................................................ 137
3.8.21. Glass Shelf ................................................................................................................. 137
3.8.22. Towel Rail ................................................................................................................... 137
3.8.23. C.P Soap Case ............................................................................................................ 137
3.8.24. C.P. Toilet Paper Holder ............................................................................................... 138
3.8.25. 3-Piece Upvc Strainer .................................................................................................. 138
3.8.26. C.I. Gratings ................................................................................................................ 138
3.8.27. Automatic Water Heater ............................................................................................... 138
3.9. CATCH PIT ......................................................................................................................... 138
3.10. INSPECTION PIT ............................................................................................................. 139
3.11. C.I. COVER ..................................................................................................................... 139
3.12. SEPTIC TANK ................................................................................................................. 139
3.13. WASA CONNECTION ....................................................................................................... 139
3.14. WATER SUPPLY PUMP .................................................................................................. 139
3.15. SUMP PUMP .................................................................................................................. 140
3.15.3. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 141
3.16. PUMP PANEL ................................................................................................................. 141
3.16.3. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 141
3.17. ELECTRICAL CABLE CONTROL, WIRING FOR PUMP ....................................................... 142
3.17.3. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 142
3.18. ferrule connection .......................................................................................................... 142
3.18.3. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 142
3.B. SOIL, WASTE AND RAIN WATER PIPING ................................................................................. 143
3.19. uPVC Sewerage Pipe and Pipe Fittings .......................................................................... 143
3.19.3. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 144
3.20. RAIN WATER DRAIN PIPE............................................................................................... 144
3.20.3. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 144
3.21. SEWER PIPE .................................................................................................................. 144
3.21.3. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 145
3.C. GAS LINE PIPES...................................................................................................................... 146
3.22. GAS LINE WORKS .......................................................................................................... 146
3.22.2. Method of Measurement ............................................................................................. 146
3.22.3. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 146
CHAPTER 04: ELECTRICAL WORKS ...................................................................... 147

4.SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS .................................................................................. 149
4.7.1. General ....................................................................................................................... 150
4.7.2. Installation .................................................................................................................. 152
4.9.1. Materials ..................................................................................................................... 155
4.9.2. Installation .................................................................................................................. 155
4.9.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 159
4.10.1. Materials ..................................................................................................................... 159
4.10.2. Installation .................................................................................................................. 160
4.10.3. Method ofMeasurement ............................................................................................... 160
4.10.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 160
4.12.1. Materials ..................................................................................................................... 161
4.12.2. Installation .................................................................................................................. 161
4.12.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 162
4.13.1. Materials ..................................................................................................................... 162
4.13.2. Installation .................................................................................................................. 163
4.13.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 163
4.14.1. Materials ..................................................................................................................... 163
4.14.2. Installation .................................................................................................................. 164
4.14.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 164
4.15.1. Materials ..................................................................................................................... 165
4.15.2. Installation .................................................................................................................. 166
4.15.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 166
4.16.1. Materials ..................................................................................................................... 166
4.16.2. Installation .................................................................................................................. 166
4.16.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 167
4.17.1. Materials ..................................................................................................................... 167
4.17.2. Installation .................................................................................................................. 167
4.17.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 168
4.18.1. Materials ..................................................................................................................... 168
4.18.2. Installation .................................................................................................................. 168
4.18.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 169
4.19.1. Materials ..................................................................................................................... 169
4.19.2. Installation .................................................................................................................. 169
4.19.4. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 171
4.20.1. Materials ..................................................................................................................... 171
4.20.2. Installations................................................................................................................. 172
4.20.3. Basis of Payment ........................................................................................................ 174
4.22.1. General ....................................................................................................................... 176
4.22.2. Visual Inspection ......................................................................................................... 176
4.22.3. Testing ....................................................................................................................... 176
4.22.4. Certificate ................................................................................................................... 179
CHAPTER 05: ইমারত নিমাণ

ম নিনিমালা ......................................................... 181
...................................................................................................................................... 183
5.1.1. .................................................................. 183
5.1.2. ................ 183
5.1.3. ........................... 192

CHAPTER 01: GENERAL GUIDE LINE, MATERIALS
SPECIFICATIONS & SAFETY SECURITY MEASURES
CHAPTER 01: GENERAL GUIDELINE, MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS & SAFETY SECURITY MEASURES
GENERAL GUIDE LINE, MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS & SAFETY SECURITY

MEASURES
ALL DEVELOPERS / CONTRACTORS NEED TO FOLLOW THE BELLOW PROCEDURES TO IMPLEMENT ANY
CONSTRUCTION WORK.
 Step-1. Preparation of design drawing & obtaining approval from concerned authority / statutory
bodies
Well experienced Architects and Engineers should be engaged for development of Design& Drawings for better
performance & smooth construction of the Infrastructures.
 Step-2.Selection of contractors and signing of agreement
The selected Contractors must be of at least 5 years in relevant work experience with sufficient Technical
personnel, Construction equipment & must be financially solvent.
 Step-3. Implementation of construction activities:
GENERAL GUIDE LINE AND MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1. Location and Description of the Project
The project envisages Construction of any Building / Infrastructure project at anywhere in

Bangladesh.
1.2. Scope of Work under the Contract
The work shall consist of construction of RCC individual footing / isolated footing/ pile footing/Mat
footing as mentioned in the Drawing & BOQ, RCC structure as superstructure of the building
including 1st class Brick wall, beams and slabs, partitions, internal and external finishing, doors,
and windows etc. including necessary electrical, mechanical, sanitary and plumbing, site
development including earth/sand filling etc. works as per the schedule of items and in accordance
with drawings and specifications and approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
1.3. Submittal
The submittal by the contractor shall include all shop drawings, reports samples, test results etc.
to conform with applicable provisions of the general conditions of contract and as required under
various section of the specifications. The purpose of the submittal required herein is to assure that
items furnished and installed are in all matters of consequence equivalent to the specified items
and that proper records are maintained of the changes made in the specifications, drawings or in
materials used or deviations made in the construction process.
The Contractor shall forward all submittal with a forwarding letter stating that the submittals have
been carefully reviewed by the construction and the on-site conditions of dimensions, where
necessary and correctness have been verified and checked.
Page 17 of 194
PREPARED BY VITTI STHAPATI BRINDO LTD.
CHAPTER 01: GENERAL GUIDE LINE, MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS & SAFETY SECURITY MEASURES
The submittal shall be reviewed by the Engineer-in-charge to verify that the contractor’s obligations
are fulfilled as per true intention of the contract. In checking and approving submittal the Owner
does not relieve the contractor from responsibility for construction errors or omission, which may
occur, even though executed in accordance with approved shop drawings. Any such errors or
omissions as are discovered later should be made good by the Contractor irrespective of any
approval by the employer at no additional cost to the employer. This does not apply to modifications
approved as specified herein.
The Contractor shall make submittal sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to allow
time for checking and rechecking if necessary. Any work fabricated or installed by the contractor
prior to approval of shop drawings or other required submittal shall be done at his own cost.
1.4. Shop Drawings and As-built Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare at his own cost Shop Drawings to show all elements of construction
that are required to assure proper shop fabrication or job installation of items requiring Shop
Drawings. All materials quality, finishes, construction details as specifically related to the project
must be shown on the Shop Drawings.
The Contractor at his own cost shall prepare and submit “As-built” drawing as specified in the
Contract.
1.5. Laboratory Test Results
Where laboratory tests are required by the specifications, either before or during construction
operations, the Contractor will arrange at his own cost to get such tests done in accordance with
the appropriate reference requirements specified in the Contract. Where such tests are conducted
prior to actual construction for approval purposes the Contractor shall submit reports of the test
results to the Employer/Consultant for approval along with other submittal materials before starting
the work.
1.6. Electrical, Mechanical, Sanitary and Plumbing
The general provisions of the contract agreement shall also apply to the electrical, mechanical
sanitary and plumbing and other works covered under this contract including gas system,
firefighting, fire protection works and the works shall be executed in conformity with the
specifications and schedule of items provided herein.
1.7. Examination and Acceptance
This clause shall be applicable to all items of work under this contract.
During the progress of work each item of work shall be inspected and passed as accepted by the
Engineer-in-Charge or his representative after proper examination. Any work not conforming to the
drawing and specifications and schedule of items shall be rejected and the Contractor shall take
all remedial measures as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge at the Contractor’s expense.
In addition to the examination referred to above the final survey will be made by the Engineer-in-
Charge before the work is taken over, and if a part the whole is not found to be in accordance with
Page 18 of 194
the requirements of the drawings, specifications and schedule of items, the Contractor will be
required to correct such discrepancies to meet the limits of specified tolerance for which no extra
payment shall be allowed to the Contractor.
2. TAKING OVER POSSESSION OF SITE
The Contractor shall upon receiving the work order, immediately take possession of the site and move
his men and materials to prepare the site in order to create conditions for starting the work as per terms
of contract, drawings and specification.
3. MOBILIZATION
The work of mobilization shall consist of carrying out the following listed actions together with all other
requirements of the Contract in regard to commencing the execution of the work by the Contractor, at his
own cost.
a. Procurement, assembly, repairs and make running condition of all the contractor-owned constructional
plant and equipment by the contractor at any other site convenient to him.
b. Transportation of Contractor-owned constructional plant, equipment and material from the storage site as
mentioned in (a) above to the construction site.
c. Assembly and installation of all items of constructional plants, equipment etc. required for the execution of
the works.
d. Receive all construction plant, equipment and materials to be furnished by the Employer, if any, and collect
and transport them to the site of the Work. All materials shall be properly stored, inventoried and protected
until used into the work and all plants and equipment shall be tested and made ready for use.
e. The Contractor shall construct a suitable site office building, and shed for storage of materials and
equipment, workshop, other additional buildings and First-Aid Centre attended by suitable Medical
Assistants to provide First-Aid at Contractor’s cost. If proper space is not available for storing Aggregates,
Sand in bulk, Contractor shall arrange his own accommodation. Max. 3 days-consumption materials may
be available at site.
f. Maintain all temporary roads, fences and sanitary facilities, keep all areas used by the Contractor clean,
neat, and well-kept and in good repair and provide proper drainage to protect the area from surface run-off
and flooding.
g. Provide all the required electric power, water supply, gas supply and other utility connections of temporary
installations at the site as may be necessary for the execution of the work.
h. Obtain all insurance Policies, Performance bond and payment guarantees as required under this Agreement
and conditions.
i. Payment of all fees, permits, licenses, etc. as may be required covering the execution of the contract.
4. CLEANING OF SITE
4.1. Before Starting the Work
The Contractor shall remove all the undesirable materials from the site to facilitate construction
work at site through cleaning the site by dismantling and removing temporary sheds, columns,
pillars, pavements, rubbish, earth, broken materials, fences, boundary walls etc. at his own cost.
4.2. During Execution of Work
During execution of the work the contractor shall remove or protect, at his own cost, different
service line if any, viz. sewerage, water supply pipe, drains, electric/telephone cables etc. after
taking prior permission from the relevant authorities and Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 19 of 194
During execution of the work excess spoil earth, debris, rubbish, any dismantled items or any such
unwanted item shall be removed by the Contractor at his own cost to a safe place as directed by
the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.3. After Completion of Work
The work of cleaning the site shall consist of carrying out the following listed actions together with
all other requirements of the Contract in regard to completion of the work by the Contractor at his
own cost and handing over the work complete to the Employer.
a. The dismantling and removal of all Contractor’s constructional plants and equipment from the Site.
b. Dismantling and removing of temporary building from the Site.
c. Dismantling transporting, reconditioning and storing of all constructional plants, equipment, surplus
materials (if any) etc. furnished by the Employer to places as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge in
a suitable manner.
d. Removal of all water, electricity, gas supply connections and utilities, which become redundant on
the completion of the work in a manner directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
e. Over all cleanup of the site and work area in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer-in-Charge.
5. TEMPORARY FACILITIES
5.1. General
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide all necessary temporary facilities required to
accomplish the work in a safe and orderly manner as specified in the contract.
5.2. Field Office and Installation
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at his own expense a suitable field office and such
additional storage sheds and temporary buildings as required. The design and location of such
structures shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The field office shall be of ample size for
use by the supervisory personnel of the Consultant and the Employer and by persons as required
by the Contractor and as required for storage and display of drawings and other records. It shall
be accessible at all times to the Owner’s / Consultant’s representatives.
5.3. Sanitary Facilities
The Contractor shall provide an adequate number of toilets as necessary for all persons engaged
on the work. The provisions for sanitary facilities and the maintenance thereof shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
The wastage from toilets shall be disposed of by means of septic tank and soak pit or by some
other acceptable disposal system. All sanitary facilities shall be kept clean and shall be frequently
disinfected by the Contractor.
5.4. Water
The Contractor shall at his own expense, provide adequate supply of water of acceptable quality at
the construction site for execution of the work.
Page 20 of 194
5.5. Drinking Water
The Contractor shall provide drinking water for all personnel and workers on the works. All water,
which may be used for drinking purposes, shall be obtained from a recognized source of potable
water.
5.6. Electric Power and Lighting
The Contractor shall make all arrangements for obtaining temporary electric power and shall pay
all costs in connection thereof as well as the costs of all energy consumed during execution of the
work until the date of completion.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense provide adequate lighting at the construction site during
the execution of work.
The Contractor shall at his own expenses, remove the temporary electrical power and lighting
systems after completion of the work as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
5.7. First Aid Centre
The Contractor shall provide at his own cost a First Aid Medical Centre with adequately qualified
personnel, materials and medicine for services at all time during execution of the work.
5.8. Fire Fighting Equipment
The Contractor shall arrange at his own cost adequate firefighting equipment at site for bringing,
initial fire hazards, under control.
5.9. Protective Barrier and Hanging Platform
The Contractor shall arrange at his own cost suitable protective barriers at the edge of pits,
openings in floors, vertical ducts, at the edge of floors, roof, vertical walls, etc. Especially at higher
floor levels so that careless fall of working personnel may be safeguarded.
The Contractor shall provide at his own cost wire net, platform or any other suitable device placed
in horizontal plan around the vertical faces of the building at suitable places immediately below the
area where work is in progress at a particular time so that careless fall of working personnel may
be guarded against.
5.10. Police and health regulations
The Contractor shall obey all municipal, police and health regulations and all other regulations.
5.11. Lifts and Cranes
The Contractor shall provide at his own cost lifting arrangement and cranes for lifting men and
materials to higher floors as required for execution of the work.
Page 21 of 194
6. PROTECTION AND SAFETY
6.1. Measures to be Taken
The Contractor shall at times protect the excavation, trenches, building and material from rainwater,
ground water, backing up of drains and from water of any origin. He shall provide all pumping
arrangements for removal of surplus water, coverings and other materials as required.
All rubbish and debris shall be removed from the project site and disposed of at a safe distance as
per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge so as not to create any obstruction to work or give rise to
health hazards.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure against fire during construction. All
necessary arrangements must be made by the Contractor for providing adequate protection against
fire hazards at the construction site during the period of execution of the work.
6.2. Safety Manuals
International Safety Manuals used in Engineering Construction Project shall be adopted for
protection and safety at the construction site of the project during the period of construction. (See
Annexure-A)
7. MATERIALS, TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
7.1. General
The requirements of this section are applicable to all work under this Contract.
7.2. Products
The Contractor at is own expenses shall provide the materials, products and equipment as shown
on the drawings or as specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall provide necessary
transportation, safe storage, supervision etc.
7.3. Equal Products and Equivalents
Except as specially required otherwise, the mention of any product materials trade name is intended
to establish a standard of quality, appearance, size & durability. The products of other
manufacturer’s may be used subject to the conditions as stated in Clause 7.04 and 7.05
hereinafter.
7.4. Additional Costs Related to Substitutions
Any additional cost, or any loss or damages, arising from the substitution of any material or method
from those originally specified shall be borne by the Contractor, unless such substitution was made
at the written request or direction of the Owner.
7.5. Failure of Equal Products
Where products are accepted based on representations of the Contractor, as an approved equals,
they shall be used subject to the same installation and performance standards as required by the
original specification. Approval of a request for substitution shall not modify contract requirements
Page 22 of 194
except as specially note. Subsequent failure of ‘approved equals’ shall be considered first and
evidence of improper installation or production in equality and the installation shall be repaired or
corrected as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge at no additional cost to the Owner.
7.6. Equipment and Tools
The Contractor shall furnish all constructional plans for the proper execution of the work at his own
expense and keep them clean and in proper working condition. The Contractor shall supply the
Employer / Engineer-in-charge a list of major items of the constructional plants, equipment and
tools that he proposes to use in execution of the work.
8. PREPARATION OF SITE
8.1. Mobilization/Site Clearing/Temporary Facilities
Appropriate conditions of clauses from the mobilization, clearing of site and temporary facilities as
specified in the previous Article Nos. 3, 4 & 5 herein above shall be completed before starting the
work as felt necessary and direction by the Engineer-in-Charge.
8.2. Unfavorable Weather Condition
No utilities shall be constructed or installed and no pavement or fill material shall be placed, spread,
or rolled during unfavorable weather conditions. When the work is interrupted by rain, fill operations
shall not be resumed until field test by the Engineer’s representative indicates that the moisture
content and density of the fill are as specified in these specifications, or are in condition suitable
enough, in the opinion of the Engineer’s representative, for resuming the work.
8.3. Dewatering Arrangements
The Contractor shall arrange at his own cost necessary arrangement for bailing out of surplus water
from the foundation pits, trenches, etc. by installing pumps, trenches, pipes etc. as may be
necessary during the construction period.
8.4. Checking Site Measurement
The Contractor shall check all the vital measurements of the building layout plan and submit a
report to the Employer/Engineer-in-Charge the deviation, if any, from the dimensions shown in the
approved drawings for the building before starting construction work in case of any deviation of
unacceptable amount, the Engineer-in-Charge will inform the Contractor of the remedial measures
which may be necessary in a particular situation.
8.5. Permanent Bench Marks
Before commencing the work the contractor shall establish at least 3 (three) numbers permanent
bench mark (BM) on pucca pillars in suitable positions as per direction the Engineer-in-Charge at
his own cost. These B.M. shall be incorporated in the drawings and used for controlling all levels
of construction work. The contractor at the own expense shall make necessary arrangement to
protect those B.M. pillars against disturbance/ damage including its maintenance.
Page 23 of 194
8.6. ReferenceLine Pillars
The contractor shall establish pucca reference line pillars (axis pillars, central line pillars etc.) at
his own cost, for all structures before starting of excavation of foundation pits/trenches as per
standard practice and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
9. SAMPLES & TESTS
9.1. Samples
In addition to the special provisions made hereafter as to sampling and testing of materials by
particular methods, the Engineer-in-Charge may call for samples of all materials together with
details of their sources and workmanship proposed to be employed in the execution of the works
and such samples shall be furnished by the contractor without delay and without charge.
Approved samples will be kept by the Engineer-in-Charge who may reject at any time all materials
of workmanship not corresponding in quality and character with the approval sample. The
contractor shall provide without extra charges, suitable labeled containers for the storage of
samples.
9.2. Tests
The Engineer-in-Charge may send inspectors to the manufacturer’s premises to test materials or
supervise their manufacture. Should the Engineer-in-Charge decide not to send an inspector to the
manufacturers works, the contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer certificates of tests, proof
sheets, etc. showing that the materials have been tested in accordance with the requirements of
the specification relating thereto. Notwithstanding any test that may have been carried out before
materials leave manufacturer’s premises not the production of manufacturer’s certificates of test,
proof sheets etc. materials may also be tested after delivery to site, and the Engineer-in-Charge
shall be at liberty to reject after delivery or after incorporation in the permanent work any materials
found to be unsuitable or not in accordance with the specification.
9.3. Additional Tests
In addition to the tests required under the clauses hereof, the Engineer-in-Charge shall have power
to order independent tests of materials to be carried out by some Agency appointed by him at such
place as he may determine and the results to such tests shall be binding upon all parties, no claim
by the contractor being admissible in respect or as a consequence thereof.
9.4. Standard Specification
Except where otherwise specified or authorized by the Engineer-in-Charge all materials shall
conform to the latest edition of the appropriate ASTM (American Society for Testing and Material).
Specification or to any other standard specification of whatever origin, that may be approved by
the Engineer-in-Charge.
9.5. Works Test Rules
Tests of concrete work shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM C-39 and other rules as
prescribed by Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 24 of 194
10. TEST TO BE PERFOMED
Unless provided otherwise in the specification or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, any or all of the
following tests shall be performed as may be require by the Consultant to ascertain whether the quality
of material and/or of any finished or partially finished work is appropriate for the purpose which it is or
was intended to fulfil in accordance with the specifications. All cost including transportation, storage and
incidental cost of the tests required hereunder shall be borne by the contractor at any place directed by
the consultants.
11. FINE AGGREGATES (SAND)
11.1. General
Sand shall be natural sand composed of clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles resulting from the
disintegration of silicaceous and / or calcareous rocks, or manufactured sand resulting from the
crushing of boulder or shingle. Fine Aggregate shall consist of natural sand conforming to the
requirements of AASHTO standard specification.
11.2. Sampling
Sand shall be sampled in accordance with Standard Test Procedures. Samples thus collected shall
be tested for grading, F.M, and any other tests instructed by the Engineer. Sample shall be
collected from a source of 20 cum. of sand or more.
11.3. Appearance
Sand shall be completely non plastic and free of all clay, roots and other organic materials
11.4. Particle Size
The particle size distribution shall be determined in accordance with standard Test Procedures.
The FM shall be calculated in accordance with Standard Test Procedures. The grading of the
various sizes of sands shall be as shown in the following tables
Grading Limits for Sands

Nominal FM 2.8-3.1 1.5-2.8 1.0-1.5 0.8-1.0 0.5-0.8
Sieve Size % Passing
9.5 mm 100 100 100 100 100
4.75 mm 90-95 90-100 100 100 100
2.36 mm 70-90 90-100 100 100 100
1.18 mm 45-70 70-95 95-100 100 100
600 micron 25-45 45-85 85-95 95-100 100
300 micron 10-20 20-50 50-70 70-80 80-90
150 micron 0-2 0-2 20-35 35-40 40-60
Page 25 of 194
11.5. Impurities
Sand shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of organic impurities. Deleterious substances
shall not exceed the following percentages by weight
Material passing No.2000 sieve 2.0

Shale, coal, soft or flaky fragments 1.0
Sulphur compounds 0.3
Clay Lumps (wet, on No.4 sieve) 0.00
11.6. Supply and Stocking
Supply methods and stock piling of sand shall be such as to permit ready identification of the
materials delivered and shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
12. COARSE AGGREGATES
12.1. Aggregates General
Aggregates for all concrete work shall conform to the standard specification for concrete
aggregates according to ASTM C-33. They shall consist of natural stands and gravel, crushed
stones, crushed picked jhama, bricks or other approved sound materials, and shall be hard strong,
and durable, free from clay films, organic materials and other adherent coatings and shall conform
to the dimensions and grading specified for the several parts of th works. Aggregates shall be
stored at the works in such a manner as to avoid contamination and shall, if ordered by the
Engineer-in-Charge be screened and washed before use. Clean fresh water shall be used for the
purpose of washing
12.2. Sampling
Samples shall be collected from a stockpile of 20 cum. of stone chips or more as per AASHTO
Test No. T2-84.
12.3. Particle Size Distribution
The aggregates shall conform to one of the following grading depending on the nominal size of
aggregate specified in the schedule and drawings.
Percentage by weight passing of nominal aggregate size
Nominal size/ 63mm 40mm 20mm 14mm 10mm

Sieve size
75.0 mm 100% - - - -
63.0 mm 100% 100% - - -
37.5 mm 0-30% 85-100% 100 - -
20.0 mm 05% 0-25% 85-100% 100% -
14.0 mm - - - 85-100% -
10.0 mm - 0-5% 0-25% 0-50% 85-100%
5.0 mm - - - 0-10% 0-25%
2.0 mm - - - - 0-5%
The gradation curve should be of “S” shape conforming to a well-graded aggregate mass.
Page 26 of 194
12.4. Unit weight
The unit weight shall be determined in accordance with standard test Procedures. The unit weight
test shall be carried out on the materials as sampled after drying. The unit weight of aggregates
shall not be less than 1610 kg/cum.
12.5. Abrasion
The abrasion shall be determined in accordance with standard test Procedures. Aggregate with
Nominal sizes 63 mm. 40 mm, and 20 mm shall be tested in accordance with Grade 'B' materials.
Aggregate with nominal sizes 14 mm and 10 mm shall be tested in accordance with Grade C
materials. The percentage of wear shall not exceed 30%.
12.6. Soundness
The weighted average loss after five cycles shall not be more than 12 percent when the coarse
aggregate is subjected to the sodium sulphate soundness test, AASHTO Designation T 104.
12.7. Ten Percent Fines Value (TVF)
The methods are applicable to both weak & strong aggregate passing a 14.0 m test sieve and
retained on a 10.0 mm test sieve. Ten Percent Fines Value should not be less than 150 KN.
12.8. Flakiness Index
The test procedure describes the method for the determination of the flakiness index of coarse
aggregate. The flakiness index is found by separating the flaky particles and expressing their mass
as a percentage of the mass of the sample tested. The flakiness Index should not be greater than
35% of the sample tested.
12.9. Elongation Index
This test procedure describes the method for the determination of the elongation index of coarse
aggregate. The Elongation Index is found by separating the elongated particles and expressing their
mass as a percentage of the mass of sample tested. The Elongation Index should not be less than
12.10. Deleterious Substances
The amount of deleterious substances shall not exceed the following limits:
Deleterious Materials Max. Permissible Limits % by weight
 Soft fragments 3
 Coal and Lignite 1
 Shale 1
 Clay Lumps 0.25
 Materials passing the no. 200 sieve 1
 No other deleterious substances such as chart and limonite concretions, which will readily
disintegrate.
Page 27 of 194
12.11. Prior Approval Aggregates
The type and source of all aggregate shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before the
materials are delivered to site.
12.12. Storage of Aggregates
The handling and storage of concrete aggregates shall be such as to prevent segregation or the
inclusion of foreign materials. The Engineer may require that aggregates be stored on separate
platforms at satisfactory locations. When specified in the documents, the coarse aggregate shall
be separated into two or more sizes in order to secure greater uniformity of the concrete mixture.
Different sizes of aggregates shall be stored in separate stockpiles sufficiently apart from each
other to prevent the materials at the edges of the piles from becoming intermixed.
13. CEMENT
13.1. General
Cement in the general sense of the word, can be described as a material with adhesive and
cohesive properties, which make it capable of bonding mineral fragments into a compact whole.
The definition embraces a large variety of cementing materials.
For constructional purposes the meaning of the term cement is restricted to the bonding materials
used with stones, sand bricks, building blocks, etc. the principal constituents of this type of cement
are compounds of lime, so that in building and civil engineering we are concerned with calcareous
cement. Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to requirements of the standard
specifications for Portland Cement Type I, ASTM C-150. The physical requirements should
conform to ASTM Designation CE-50.
13.2. Sampling
Cement shall be sampled in accordance with Standard Test Procedures. For each consignment not
exceeding 25 tons at least 3 (three) samples shall be tested to ascertain:
 Fineness
 Consistency
 Initial and Final Setting time
 Compressive strength
13.3. Test on Physical Properties of Cement
A number of tests are performed in the laboratory to ensure that the cement is of the desired quality
and that it conforms to the requirements of the relevant national standards. Tests on the physical
properties prescribed by ASTM for ordinary Portland Cements are given below.
(i) Appearance: Cement shall be free from any hardened lumps and any foreign material.
(ii) Fineness: The fineness of cement shall be determined in accordance with Standard Test
Procedures. Cement shall have a minimum of 90% of particles by weight passing through the 75-
micron sieve.
Page 28 of 194
(iii) Setting time: Setting time shall be determined in accordance with Standard Test Procedures.
Cement shall have an initial setting time in excess of 45 minutes and a final setting time not greater
than 7 hours. The test shall be carried out at 30 degrees Centigrade.
(iv) Strength: The strength of cement shall be determined in accordance with Standard Test
Procedures. The crushing strength of 100mm standard concrete cubes shall not be less than 12.4
N/mm² at 3 days and 19.3 N/mm² at 7 days & 27.6 N/mm2 at 28 days.
13.4. Delivery of Bagged Cement
Cement shall be delivered in sound undamaged bags uncontaminated by moisture, oil or any other
substance. The nominal weight of a bag of cement shall be 50kg. Individual bags which vary by
more than 5% from the nominal weight shall be rejected. Where the average weight of 50 bags
taken at random from any one consignment is less than the nominal weight, the whole consignment
shall be rejected. Every bag shall be marked with the manufacture's brand, the type of cement,
identification number or numbers relating to the testing and certification of the cement, and the
date the bag was filled. The contents of broken or damaged bags shall not be re-bagged.
13.5. Storage and Handling of Cement
The following requirements shall apply to the storage and handling of cement at site or at any
intermediate transfer or storage point:
i) All methods for transporting, handling and storing bagged cement shall be planned and arranged
to ensure the use or transfer of cement in the approximate chronological order of manufacture.
ii) Batches of cement procured at different times shall be stored separately and shall not be mixed.
iii) All loading and unloading facilities for cement shall be under cover and weatherproof to the
satisfaction of the "Engineer-in-Charge".
iv) All bagged cement shall be stored at all times upto its use in the works in completely
weatherproof structures which shall include a timber floor raised not less than 300mm above the
surrounding ground and be adequately ventilated to prevent the accumulation of moisture.
v) All storage of bagged cement shall be arranged to permit easy access for inspection and definite
identification of all cement in the storage.
vi) The temperature of the cement at any time shall not exceed 60°C.
13.6. Brand to be Used
Cemex, Holcem, Lafarge, Elephant Brand or approved equivalent
13.7. Rejection
The Engineer-in-Charge may reject any cement as the result of any tests thereof notwithstanding
the manufacturer’s certificate. The Engineer may also reject cement which has deteriorated owing
to inadequate protection or from other causes where the cement is not to his satisfaction. The
contractor shall remove at his cost all rejected cement from site without delay.
14. WHITE CEMENT
It shall be made from pure calcite lime stone and have the same physical properties as that of Portland
Cement Type I, ASTM C-150.
Page 29 of 194
A typical composition of white cement is as follows:
Cao - 65.0%
Sio2 - 25.5%
AI2, O2 - 5.9%
Fe2 ,02 - 0.6%
MgO - 1.1%
SO2 - 0.1%
15. BRICKS
15.1. General
Bricks shall be manufactured from clay or shale or a combination of these materials and shall be
uniformly burnt throughout. They shall be hard and sound and give a clear metallic ring when
struck with a small hammer or another brick, and should not break when dropped to the earth
from a height of 1.5m with one brick above another forming ‘T’. The surface should be too hard
to be scratched with the fingernail.
15.2. Sampling
Sample shall be taken randomly. For each consignment not exceeding 50,000 bricks at least 10
(ten) bricks shall be tested to ascertain.
First Class Machine Made / Hand Made Brick shall comply with the following requirements
15.3. Brick Dimensions: ( BS 3921 : 1985 )
Brick “Work size” dimensions shall be 244 mm (length) x 118 mm (width) x 74 mm (height). The
size of any individual brick in the sample shall not deviate from the work size by more than 6 mm
on length nor 6 mm on width or height Individual bricks are not required to comply with the
“Coordinating size”.
The overall measurement of 24 “as-fixed” bricks measured shall not fall outside the limits specify
below mentioned.
Brick Dimensions – Overall Limits

Overall measurement of 24 bricks
“Work size “ (mm) Maximum (mm) Minimum (mm)
244 (Length) 5952 5760
118 (Width) 2904 2760
74(Height) 1848 1704
15.4. Absorption Test of Bricks : ( BS 3921 : 1985 )
Maximum water absorption of a 10 brick when immersed in water for one hour shall not be more
than 18% of the oven dry mass.
Page 30 of 194
15.5. Compressive Test of Bricks: ( BS 3921 : 1985 )
(i) Characteristic Compressive strength (defined as sample mean less 1.64 times the standard
deviation) of 10 brick sample shall not be lower than 15 N/mm2.
(ii) Mean compressive strength of a 10 brick sample shall not be lower than 18 N/mm2.
(iii) No individual strength lower than 13 N/mm2.
15.6. First Class Machine Made / Hand Made Bricks
First Class Machine Made / Hand Made Brick shall be thoroughly brunt and shall have plane
rectangular faces with parallel sides and sharp straight right-angled edges. They shall be of
uniform color (generally deep red or copper), homogeneous in a texture and free from crack, flaws
and nodules of free lime. A fractured surface shall show a uniform compact structure free from
limps, grits of holes.
15.7. Picked, Jhama Bricks
Picked Jhama Bricks shall be over-burnt First Class Machine Made Bricks. Uniformly vitrified
throughout with good shape, hard slightly black in colour, and without cracks or spongy areas.
All other requirements for First Class Machine Made Bricks shall apply to Picked Jhama except
for dimensions.
15.8. Perforated Bricks
Perforated bricks shall meet the following Specifications:
Minimum compressive strength on gross area
Multi-core brick 7 N / MM 2
10-hole engineering bricks 21 N / MM 2
Maximum size of perforation 645 mm2 (1 sq. in)
maximum number of perforation
Along width of brick 2
Along length of brick 6
Minimum wall thickness

Between brick edge and perforation 16 mm
Between adjacent perforation 10 mm
Maximum water absorption capacity 12% of dry wt.
Efforescence Nil
Dimensions (+1/8”) (241 mm x 114 mm x 70 mm)
“
The perforations may be of any regular shape in cross section. In case of rectangular section,
the larger dimension shall be parallel to the brick. Dimension of perforation measured parallel to
the plane of the shorter side shall not be more than 16 mm (5/8”) except in case of circular shape
of the perforation in which case it may be allowed upto 20mm (3/4”). Total area of perforation
shall not exceed 45% of the total area of corresponding faces of the brick.
Page 31 of 194
In all other respects the perforated bricks shall conform to the specification of First Class Machine
Made Brick.
15.9. Clinker Bricks
Clinker bricks shall be manufactured by dry process and burnt to a higher temperature and shall
be uniformly vitrified to a dark copper tone.
Arises shall be square, straight and sharply defined.
Clinker bricks or tiles shall meet the following requirements:

Minimum compressive strength 55 N / MM 2
Minimum modules of rupture 4 N / MM 2
Maximum water absorption capacity 12% - 15% of dry wt.
Efflorescence Nil
Dimensions (+1/8”) (203 mm x 102 mm x 51 mm)
16. BRICK CHIPS (KHOA)
16.1. General
Aggregate shall be as far practically as possible of uniform specific gravity. Blown bricks or
unevenly burnt bricks shall not be crushed for purposes of providing aggregates. Best possible
1st class picked jhama bricks of selected quality and best quality boulders/stores only shall be
allowed to be crushed.
Brick Chips (Khoa) shall consist of 1st class picked jhama brick chips or gravel graded as shown
in the tale below. All coarse aggregate shall be screened and washed at contractor’s own cost,
and shall consist of clean, well-shaped cubical particles, free from splintered or flaky particles,
soil, organic matter or any deleterious materials. A representative sample shall interior in any way
to the approved sample.
16.2. Test of Brick Chips
The grading of coarse aggregate shall be within the following limits:

Normal Size of Aggregate Percentage Passing
75 mm 40 mm 20mm 10mm 5mm No.17
40mm 100 95-100 30-70 10-35 0-5 -
20mm - 100 95-100 25-35 0-10 0-5
16.3. Storage of Brick Chips
Brick Chips (Khoa) shall be stored at site in such a manner that it is not contaminated by fine
aggregate earth or other foreign matter. Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent
segregation of the coarse aggregate while it is being transported a stacked.
17. STONE CHIPS/COARSE AGGREGATES
Page 32 of 194
17.1. General
Aggregates for all concrete work shall conform to the standard specification for concrete
aggregates according to ASTM C-33. They shall consist of natural crushed stones (Sylhet Stone)
and shall be hard strong, and durable, free from clay films, organic materials and other adherent
coatings and shall conform to the dimensions and grading specified for the several parts of the
works. Aggregates shall be stored at the works in such a manner as to avoid contamination and
shall, if ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge be screened and washed before use. Clean fresh water
shall be used for the purpose of washing
17.2. Sampling
Samples shall be collected from a stockpile of 20 cum. of stone chips or more as per AASHTO
Test No. T2-84.
17.3. Particle Size Distribution
The aggregates shall conform to one of the following grading depending on the nominal size of
aggregate specified in the schedule and drawings.
Percentage by weight passing of nominal aggregate size

Nominal size/ 63mm 40mm 20mm 14mm 10mm
Sieve size
75.0 mm 100% - - - -
63.0 mm 100% 100% - - -
37.5 mm 0-30% 85-100% 100 - -
20.0 mm 05% 0-25% 85-100% 100% -
14.0 mm - - - 85-100% -
10.0 mm - 0-5% 0-25% 0-50% 85-100%
5.0 mm - - - 0-10% 0-25%
2.0 mm - - - - 0-5%
The gradation curve should be of “S” shape conforming to a well-graded aggregate mass.
17.4. Unit weight
The unit weight shall be determined in accordance with standard test Procedures. The unit weight
test shall be carried out on the materials as sampled after drying. The unit weight of aggregates
shall not be less than 1610 kg/cum.
17.5. Abrasion
The abrasion shall be determined in accordance with standard test Procedures. Aggregate with
Nominal sizes 63 mm. 40 mm, and 20 mm shall be tested in accordance with Grade 'B' materials.
Aggregate with nominal sizes 14 mm and 10 mm shall be tested in accordance with Grade C
materials. The percentage of wear shall not exceed 30%.
Page 33 of 194
17.6. Soundness
The weighted average loss after five cycles shall not be more than 12 percent when the coarse
aggregate is subjected to the sodium sulphate soundness test, AASHTO Designation T 104.
17.7. Ten Percent Fines Value (TVF)
The methods are applicable to both weak & strong aggregate passing a 14.0 m test sieve and
retained on a 10.0 mm test sieve. Ten Percent Fines Value should not be less than 150 KN.
17.8. Flakiness Index
The test procedure describes the method for the determination of the flakiness index of coarse
aggregate. The flakiness index is found by separating the flaky particles and expressing their mass
as a percentage of the mass of the sample tested. The flakiness Index should not be greater than
17.9. Elongation Index
This test procedure describes the method for the determination of the elongation index of coarse
aggregate. The Elongation Index is found by separating the elongated particles and expressing
their mass as a percentage of the mass of sample tested. The Elongation Index should not be less
than 25% of the sample tested.
17.10. Deleterious Substances
The amount of deleterious substances shall not exceed the following limits:
Deleterious Materials Max. Permissible Limits % by weight
 Soft fragments 3
 Coal and Lignite 1
 Shale 1
 Clay Lumps 0.25
 Materials passing the no. 200 sieve 1
 No other deleterious substances such as chart and limonite concretions, which will readily
disintegrate.
17.11. Prior Approval of Aggregates
The type and source of all aggregate shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before the
materials are delivered to site.
17.12. Storage of Aggregates
The handling and storage of concrete aggregates shall be such as to prevent segregation or the
inclusion of foreign materials. The Engineer may require that aggregates be stored on separate
platforms at satisfactory locations. When specified in the documents, the coarse aggregate shall
be separated into two or more sizes in order to secure greater uniformity of the concrete mixture.
Different sizes of aggregates shall be stored in separate stockpiles sufficiently apart from each
other to prevent the materials at the edges of the piles from becoming intermixed.
Page 34 of 194
18. REINFORCING STEEL
18.1. General
This item shall consist of furnishing and placing in concrete, reinforcing steel of the quality, type,
size and quantity designated, all as required by these specifications and as shown on the
applicable drawings.The steel shall conform to ASTM A 615-82 Grade-60 and shall be of
structural grade made from billets. The ends of the bar shall be machine sheared perpendicular
to the axis of the bar. The bars shall be free from injurious defects and shall have a workman like
finish. The bars shall be uniform in diameter.
Brand: BSRM, KPRM, Anwar Steel, Rahim Steel or approved equivalent.
18.2. Testing of M.S. Deformed Bar
For each consignment not exceeding 10 tons or as directed, 3 (three) representative samples of
each size of M.S. bar shall be tested for:
 Cross-sectional area
 Unit weight
 Yield strength
 Elongation
 Bending
 Tensile strength
 Measurement of Deformation
18.3. Chemical Composition
The chemical composition should conform to the requirements of ASTM-706-82.
18.4. Process
The steel shall have been made by one or more of the following processes open-hearth, basic
oxygen, electric furnace, acid besmear.
The bars shall be rolled from new and clean billets directly reduced from ingot of properly identified
heats of open-hearth, basic oxygen or electric furnace steel or lots of acid besmear steel.
18.5. Tensile Properties
The tensile properties of the Grade-60 steel shall be in accordance with Table-1
Table-1 Tensile Properties
Grade 40 Grade 60 Grade 75

Tensile strength, min. psi 70,000 90,000 1,12,500
Yield strength, min. psi (N/mm2) 40,000 (230) 60000 (413) 75,000
(516)
Elongation in 8 in. min. %
Bar No.
3 11 9
4,5,6 12 9
7 - 8
8 - 8
Page 35 of 194
9 - 7
10 - 7
11 - 7
14, 18 - 7
Grade 40 bars are furnished only in sizes 3 through 6.
Particularly for this project the Contractor must use Grade-75 steel for Column, Share wall
and Matt. Grade-60 steel may be used in piles, slab, beam, stair, lintel and other structural
members.
18.6. Pin Diameter
The pin diameter required for performing bend tests shall conform to the requirements prescribed
in Table-2
Table-2 : Bend Test Requirements
Bar Description No. Pin Diameter for Bend Tests
d = nominal diameter of Specimen
Grade 40 Grade 60
3, 4, 5 4d 4d
6 5d 5d
7, 8 - 6d
9, 10, 11 - 8d
Permissible variation = for lots +5% for ¼” dia

Fromstandard weights +3.5% for 3/8” dia and above
Individual +6% for all sizes
18.7. Length
The length of the bar shall be maximum possible, but each bar shall not be less than 12 m in
length or 45.36 kg. in weight whichever is greater.
18.8. Dimensional Requirements
The nominal diameter perimeter and cross sectional areas of a deformed bar is equivalent to that
of a plan bar having the same standard weight per unit length as given in Table-3
Table-3
Deformed Bar Designation Numbers, Nominal Weights, Nominal Dimensions and Deformation
Requirements
Bar Nominal Nominal Dimensions Deformation Requirements (inch)
Designation No. Wt. (lb/ft) Dia (inch) Cross Sec- Perimeter Maximum Minimum Maximum
tional Area (Inches) Average Average Gap 12.5%
(Sq.inch) Spacing Height Chord of Nominal
of Perimeter
3 0.376 0.375 0.11 1.178 0.262 0.015 0.143

4 0.668 0.500 0.20 1.571 0.350 0.020 0.191
5 1.043 0.625 0.31 1.963 0.437 0.028 0.239
6 1.502 0.750 0.44 2.356 0.525 0.038 0.286
7 2.044 0.875 0.60 2.749 0.612 0.044 0.334
8 2.670 1.000 0.79 3.142 0.700 0.050 0.383
9 3.400 1.128 1.00 3.544 0.790 0.056 0.431
10 4.303 1.270 1.27 3.990 0.889 0.064 0.487
Page 36 of 194
11 5.313 1.410 1.56 4.430 0.987 0.071 0.540

14 7.650 1.693 2.25 5.320 1.185 0.085 0.648
18 13.600 2.257 4.00 7.090 1.580 0.102 0.864
Bar Designation Nominal Nominal Dimensions Deformation Requirements (mm)

No. Wt. (kg/m) Dia (mm) Cross Sec- Perimeter Maximum Minimum Maximum
tional Area (mm) Average Average Gap 12.5%
(cm2) Spacing Height Chord of Nominal
of Perimeter
3 0.560 9.52 0.71 29.9 6.7 0.38 3.5

4 0.994 12.70 1.29 39.9 8.9 0.51 4.9
5 1.552 15.88 2.00 49.9 11.1 0.71 6.1
6 2.235 19.05 2.84 59.8 13.3 0.96 7.3
7 3.042 22.22 3.87 69.8 15.5 1.11 8.5
8 3.973 25.40 5.10 79.8 17.8 1.27 9.7
9 5.059 28.65 6.45 90.9 20.1 1.42 10.9
10 6.403 32.26 8.19 101.4 22.6 1.62 11.4
11 7.906 35.81 10.06 112.5 25.1 1.80 13.6
14 11.384 43.00 14.52 135.1 30.1 2.16 16.5
18 20.238 57.33 25.81 180.1 40.1 2.59 21.9
18.9. ASTM Code Requirements for Deformations
a. Deformations shall be spaced along the bar at substantially uniform distances. The deformations on
opposite sides of the bar shall be similar in size and shape.
b. The deformations shall be placed with respect to the axis of the bar so that the included angle is not
less than 45 degree. Where the line of deformations forms an included angle with the axis of the
bar from 45 to 70 degree inclusive, the deformations shall alternately reverse in direction on each
side, or those on one side shall be revered in direction from those on the opposite side. Where the
line of deformation is over 70 degree, a reversal in direction is not required.
c. The average spacing or distance between deformations on each side of the bar shall not exceed
seventeenths of the nominal diameter of the bar.
d. The overall length of deformations shall be such that the gap between the ends of the deformations
on opposite sides of the bar shall not exceed 12.5% of the nominal perimeter of the bar. Where the
ends terminate in a longitudinal rib, the width of the longitudinal rib shall be considered the gap.
Where more than two longitudinal rib are involved, the total width of all longitudinal ribs shall not
exceed 25% of the nominal perimeter of the bar, furthermore, the summation of gaps shall not exceed
25% of the nominal perimeter of the bar. The nominal perimeter of the bar shall be 3.14 times the
nominal diameter.
e. The spacing, height, and gap of deformations shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table-
3.
NB : Any bar that fails to satisfy the above requirements is to be treated as plain
reinforcement according to ACI Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ACI-
318-83 / ACI-318-89, Chapter-2.
18.10. Bending of Reinforcement
All reinforcement bars shall be bent cold to pertinent dimension using bending appliances and
method approved by the Engineer. All bars of slab and beam shall invariably have standard hooks
at the end. All standard hook shall meet the following requirements; unless otherwise specified
in the drawings :
Page 37 of 194
a. A 180 degree turn plus an extension of at least four bar diameters but not less than 75 mm at the
free end of the bar.
b. A 90 degree turn plus an extension of at least 12 bar diameters at the free end of the bar.
c. For stirrup and the anchorage only :
d. For No.5 bars and smaller, 90 degree bend plus an extension of at least six bar diameters or 75
mm inch whichever is greater at free end of bar.
e. For No.6.7 and 8 bars, a 90 degree bend plus an extension of 12 bar diameters or 150 mm
whichever is greater at free end.
f. For No.8 bars and smaller, a 135 degree bend plus an extension of six bar diameters at free end.
The radii of bend measured on the inside of the bar for standard hooks shall not be less than the
values given below :
Bar Dia. Minimum radii
10 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm 2.5 bar dia
20 mm, 25 mm 3 bar dia
32 mm 4 bar dia
Bend for stirrups and ties shall have radii on the inside of the bar not less than one bar diameter.
18.11. Placing of Reinforcement
a. All reinforcing bars or wires shall be supported and wired together to prevent displacement by
construction loads or the placing of concrete. On ground and where necessary supporting concrete
or mortar blocks may be used. Over form-work, concrete, metal, plastic or other approved bar chairs
and spaces shall be used. Where the concrete surface will be exposed to the weather in the
furnished structure or where rust would impair architectural finishes the portions of all accessories
in contact with the form-work shall be galvanized or shall be made of plastic.
b. Binding wire used shall be black M.S. wire 24 SWG for binding M.S. rods of 6 mm dia and above
and 26 SWG for binding No.3 M.S. wire. If concrete cylinder block are used for proper spacing of
vertical bars in column, the height shall be 2.54 cm and radius shall be equal to the distance of the
centre line of the bar from column face.
c. The concrete cover blocks or spaces blocks shall be made concrete having 1 part cement, 1 part
sand, 2 part coarse aggregate. The coarse aggregate would be 12 mm down graded. The blocks
would be cast in mould and continuously cured for 21 days before use. Vertical bars in columns
shall be offset at least one bar diameter at lapped splices. To ensure proper placement, templates
shall be furnished for all columns dowels.
d. All splices not shown on the bar diagram shall require prior approval of the consultant/Engineer-in-
Charge
e. Unless permitted, reinforcement shall not be bent after being partially embedded in hardened
concrete. For hooks, bends, cleaning and spacing of reinforcement bars ACI Code shall be followed.
f. The reinforcement work shall be inspected and approved by the Consultant/Engineer-in-Charge
before it is covered in concrete work.
18.12. Spacing of Reinforcement
Contractor will submit bar schedule and diagrams and get it approved from the consultant. No
splices/welding shall be made in the reinforcement where described in the bar schedule.
Splices/welding at points of maximum tensile/compressive stress shall have to be avoided. The
splice shall transfer the entire computed stress from bar to bar without exceeding three fourths of
Page 38 of 194
the permissible bond values for the concrete. The length of lap shall be as mentioned in the
drawings.
Where longitudinal bars are offset at a splice the slope of the inclined portion of the bar with the
axis of the column shall not exceed 1 in 6 and the portions of the bar above and below the offset
shall be parallel to the axis of the column. Adequate horizontal support at the offset shall be
secured by additional stirrups, ties etc. Offset bars shall be bent before they are placed in the
forms.
18.13. Support of Reinforcement:
Pre-cast mortar blocks or metal supports of adequate strength, of proper depth and in sufficient
number shall be used for supporting the bars in position.
Mortar blocks shall be as small as possible consistent with their purpose, of a shape acceptable
to the Engineer and designed so that they will not overturn when concrete is placed. They shall
be made of concrete with 10 mm maximum aggregate size from same materials and of the
same max. proportions as that of the concrete in which are to be used. They shall be case and
properly cured for at least seven days before use and shall have wire or other device embedded
in the block for the purpose of attaching them securely to the reinforcement. For supporting of
Raft top reinforcement, much strong supporting device made of steel angle will be preferable.
18.14. Protective Coating
All exposed reinforcing steel at construction joints shall be protected with brush coat of neat
cement, mixed to a consistency of thick paint, within on week after the placing of the initial
concrete, unless it is definitely known that the street will be embedded within 30 days. This
coating shall entirely remove, by light tapping with a hammer or other tool, not more than one
week previous to the placing of the final pour.
18.15. Storage and Care
All reinforcing steel when received on the site, prior toits use shall be stacked off the ground and
shall be kept free from dirt, oil,grease oravoidable rust, it shall be clean and free from loose rust
and loose mill scale at thetime of fixing in position and subsequent concreting.
18.16. Tolerances for reinforcing steel:
i) Length of splice -25mm
ii) Variation of protective cover  5mm

iii) Variation in indicated position of reinforcement:
Starter bars One bar diameter
Slabs and walls 0.25 times the indicated spacing
Beams and columns  5mm
iv) Dimension of bent bars:
Stirrups and ties  5mm
Other bars  10mm
Provided the number of bars required by the specified spacing is not varied and provided the
specified minimum cover to reinforcement is maintained.
Page 39 of 194
18.17. Inspection
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representative when the steel
has been placed in position ready for concrete and no concrete shall be placed until the Engineer-
in-Charge inspected the steel and given his approval in writing.
18.18. Method of Measurement
Where unit price bids are called for in the Bid Schedule, reinforcement actually in place as shown
on the drawings, bar schedule / bar diagram or as ordered in writing by the Engineer shall be
considered for payment. No separate payment shall be allowed for chair, tap, splice, separator
etc. The cost of these is to be included in the unit rate.
18.19. Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted materials, measured as provided above, shall be paid for
at the contract unit price per quintal for “Reinforcing Steel”, which prices shall be full
compensation for furnishing, fabricating, transporting, delivering, erecting and placing all
materials, and for all labour equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
19. WATER
Water shall be clean and fresh and free from organic or inorganic matter in solution or suspension in such
amount that may impair the strength of durability of the concrete. Water shall be obtained from a public
supply where possible and shall be taken from any other source only if approved by “Engineer-in-Charge”.
No water from excavations shall be used. Only water of approved quality shall be used for washing out
shuttering curing concrete and similar purposes.
20. ADMIXTURE:
20.1. General
Admixture shall be used to provide excellent acceleration of strength gain at early ages and major
increases in strength at all ages by significantly reducing water demand in a concrete mix.,
particularly suitable for precast concrete and other high early strength requirements. In order to
significantly improve the workability in-situ mixed concrete without increasing water demand. And
for providing improvement of durability by increasing ultimate strength and reducing concrete
permeability. Admixture complies with BS 5075 Part 3 and with ASTM C494. Contractor may
use con plast SP-430, SP-211,which is product of FOSROC or any specified product, which is
approved by “Engineer-in-Charge”
20.2. Advantage:
a. Major increase in strength at early ages without increased cement contents are of particular benefit
in precast concrete, allowing earlier stripping times.
b. Makes possible major reductions in water: cement ratio which allow the production of high strength
concrete without excessive cement contents.
Page 40 of 194
c. Use in production of flowing concrete permits easier construction with quicker placing and
compaction and reduced labor costs without increasing water content.
d. Increased workability levels are maintained for longer than with ordinary sulphonated melamine
admixtures.
21. LIME
21.1. General
Lime shall be stone lime of good quality, high calcium lime containing from 95% upwards of
calcium oxide. The impurities insoluble in acids should not exceed 3% for the quick lime or 1%
for the hydrated lime.
21.2. Storage of Lime
Generally, all approved lime shall be stored as specified for cement, care being taken that where
lime is not stored in paper bags it shall be stored so that as small an area as possible is exposed
to the air and all lime storage arrangements shall be to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
22. MARBLE
22.1. Marble Stone
Marble shall be of Italian origin or equivalent, in size as per drawing having approved colour and
texture on CC/RCC slab on sand cement mortar bed (1:2)
22.2. Marble Chips
Marble chips shall be white or in approved colour and shall be of size No.2-3 (retained on sceens
¼” and 3/8” mesh). The chips shall be of uniform colour an texture and shall be made from white
marble stone, a calcareous metamorphic rock, which is capable of being polished and have
following properties.
Compressive strength 562-844 kg/cm2 (8000 – 12000 psi)

Specific gravity 2.72
Unit Weight 2563-2724 kg/m3 (160-170 p/ cft)
22.3. Marble Dust
Marble dust shall consist of finely grounded while marble stone and 90% shall pass sieve # 100.
23. TIMBER
23.1. General
All timber for temporary or permanent work shall be of the best quality, sound, straight, well
seasoned, free from sap, defects, radial cracks, cup-shakes, large, loose or dead knots, or other
imperfections and shall show a clean surface wit cut.
Page 41 of 194
23.2. Inspection
All timber shall be subject to inspection on the site, piece by piece and shall be to the approval of
the Engineer-in-Charge who may reject such timber as is considered by him to be below
specification and in the case of timber specified to be creosoge, may reject such timber before or
after creosoting. The contractor shall provide all necessary labour labour for handing the timber
during inspection free of charge.
23.3. Wrought Faces and Allowances on Joiner’s Work
All joiner’s work shall be wrought and finished with a clean, even and smooth face, the thickness
given to include 2 mm for each wrought face in soft wood and 1.5 mm for hard wood.
24. GLASS
24.1. General
Flat glass shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer and be free from blemishes of all
kinds of descriptions, whether surface or internal.
24.2. Flat Glass
Flat glass shall be provided where specified or directed in the following grades
i 24 oz flat drawn clear sheet glass

ii 32 oz. clear sheet glass
iii. 6 mm thick ‘Georgian’ rough cast wired glass
iv. 6 mm thick polished glass
24.3. Wired Glass
Wired glass shall be 6 mm thick with wire reinforcements inside and shall be obtained from an
approved manufacturer and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
25. WIRE GAUGE
25.1. General
Wired glass shall be 6 mm thick with wire reinforcements inside and shall be obtained from an
approved manufacturer and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Gauge for
fly proofing shall be of the quality uniformly woven webbing of 144 meshes per square inch. The
wire for the gauge shall be of best quality 22 SWG brasses or copper wire, or of any other
approved material.
25.2. Other Materials
Gauge known as plastic gauge may be used, subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 42 of 194
26. PAINTS AND PROTECTIVE MATERIALS
26.1. General
Knotting shall be uniform dispersion of lac or suitable resin (natural or sympathetic) in a suitable
solvent.
White lead paint shall be made from pure white lead in accordance with B.S. 239. mixed with
the boiled linseed oil turpentine, driers and pigments and strained free from skins and all
extraneous matter before being pigments, and if so used, the quantity shall not exceed 8% of
the paint mixed ready for the brush . No other ingredient except the coloring matter. The
proportions of the ingredients for the various coats shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-
in-Charge.
26.2. Red Lead Paint
Red lead paint shall be made from non-setting red lead in accordance with B.S. 217, thoroughly
ground and well and freely mixed with approximately 15% of boiled linseed oil to give a paint with
good covering power, bobby and adhesion shall be determined by tests to be made by the
contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. The Engineer-in-Charge may select
samples of the paint for analysis after a sufficient quantity for the work about to be painted has
been mixed.
26.3. Linseed Oil Putty
Putty for stopping and glazing shall consists of whiting/chalk power thoroughly ground with
linseed oil to form a smooth paste, and shall comply with B.S. 544.
26.4. Varnishes/Wood Polish
The material is required to be clear and transparent and whom applied shall on drying, give a
glossy coating free from fun and specks. The composition of the varnish shall conform to the
requirements of B.S. 274.
26.5. White Wash
White wash shall be made from pure fat lime brought to the work in an un-slaked condition. Water
shall be added to this lime in a tub until the mixture is of the consistency of cream, and shall be
allowed to rest for a period of 48 hours.
The mixture shall then be strained through an approved cloth strainer, and to each cubic feet of
the mixture obtained shall be added 4 ounces of gum boiled with 12 ounces of rice and a suitably
quantity of ‘Blue’.
26.6. Colour Wash
Colour wash, where not of an approved proprietary brand shall be made from pure selected fat
lime as described above for white wash, to which shall be added and intimately mixed the
necessary pigment to produce the tint specified. The pigment shall be to the approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 43 of 194
26.7. Oil Bound Distemper
Oil bound distemper shall comply with B.S. 1053 types 1, and shall be obtained from an approved
manufacturer.
26.8. Emulsion Paints
Robbialac / Elite Emulsion paints shall be preferably used but the Engineer-in-Charge may allow
any other brand of equivalent standard, subject to the production of appropriate test certificates
and guarantees.
26.9. Creosote
Creosote shall be pure tar distillate of the best quality as obtained and sold under the trade name
of SOLIGNUM that is creosote paint for the preservation of timber. The SOLIGNUM to be used
shall be clear SOLIGNUM so as not to mar the timber. Other brand equivalent to SOLIGNUM may
be used if approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
27. ALUMINUM MEMBERS
Aluminum doors, windows, curtain walls etc. shall be of approved standard conforming to the
U.S. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturing Association (AAMA) or equivalent specifications. The
frames and sash members shall be of extruded shape made of 6063-T5 high quality aluminum
alloy having a minimum section thickness of 1.8 mm unless otherwise shown on the drawings or
indicated in the schedule of items and shall conform to U.S. Aluminum Association or equivalent
standard.
28. STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR DOORS AND WINDOWS
All steel used indoors & windows shall be the products of reputable manufacturer and shall
conform to the American Standard Specifications. The section sizes and profile shall be as per
requirement for the specific works as shown in the drawings.
29. M.S. PIPES
MS Pipe shall be made from low carbon steel conforming to ASTM A-53 and following physical
requirements
Nominal Schedule Wall Internal Outer Wt/ft

Pipe Dia No Thickness Diameter Diameter
4” 40 0.237” 4.026” 4.500” 10.0 lbs
6” 40 0.280” 6.065” 6.626” 10.0 lbs
30. PVC PIPES
PVC Pipe shall be un-plasticize poly vinyl chloride and shall conform to the following
specifications:
Nominal Schedule Wall Internal Outer Wt/ft Pressure
Pipe Dia No Thickness Diameter Diameter
Page 44 of 194
3” 40 0.216” 3.068” 3.5” 1.380 800 psi

80 0.300” 2.800” 3.5” lbs 1000 psi
1.545
lbs
4” 40 0.237” 4.016” 4.0” 1.865 100 psi
80 0.337 3.826” 4.5” lbs 1000 psi
2.710
lbs
ANNEXURE – A: SAFETY AND SECURITY MEASURES GUIDELINE
1. INTRODUCTION
The contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate and necessary safety measures for all persons
engaged in the execution works against any injure, hazard, accidents etc. and shall take such safety
precautions as are generally accepted as good civil engineering practice.
The safety & Health is the most important program for the all construction workers. In this connection we take
some safety measures firstly each & every worker/employee should improve themselves about the safety
measures
To inspire the employee and workers a safety award will be also arrange by the project Engineer. We hope
the above stated safety & Health policy will meet the safest environment for the construction project.
2. SAFETY TRAINING
At site the safety Engineer will arrange a training session twice in a month for site workers so that the workers
can improve themselves about the safety measures. The workers will sign an attendance sheet for all training.
Safety training will be documented on the “training form-1”
3. PREPARATORY MEETINGS AND SAFETY INSPECTIONS
Before starting at every phase of the construction work, site engineer will discuss with both employees and
workers regarding safety measures and Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) and record the same. Phase of work
is listed in AHA. Site engineer will conduct the safety inspection every 3 hours in a day and maintain record
on the “Daily Safety Inspection form-2”.
4. SAFETY COMPLIANCE MONITORING
The Site Engineer will utilize safety inspections and the safety record forms (Form # 3) to monitor safety
compliance. Site inspections will be used to identify and correct safety issues and to ensure personnel are
complying with safety requirements. Safety evaluation forms (Form #4) are used to reward employees and
to identify reoccurring issues. Many times, lack of compliance is a result of poor training. The compliance
program will also support training and AHA adjustments.
5. ACCIDENT REPORTING
Contractors are to provide a safe working Environment to all of its personnel. However, if any
injury/accident occur, proper accident reporting and investigative procedure must be activated (Form # 5).
Page 45 of 194
6. MEDICAL SUPPORT FACILITY
To provide primary treatment to the injured workers or site staff a first aid box with required medicine must
be kept at site.
To provide emergency treatment facility to the injured workers or site staff, site engineer must maintain a
contact with the nearest Hospital or clinic so that he can get the help of Hospital or clinic within a very short
period.
7. SCAFFOLDING MONITORING:
All scaffolding shall be designed and constructed to provide the necessary rigidity and strength to safely
support all loads imposed and produced in the finished structure, the lines and grades indicated on the
Drawings. The supports shall be designed to withstand the worst combination of self-weight, formwork
weight, formwork forces, reinforcement weight, wet concrete weight, and construction and wind loads,
together with all incidental dynamic effects caused by placing, vibrating and compacting the concrete. No
harmful cracking should occur in the placed concrete (Form # 6).
8. SAFETY EQUIPMENT OR PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)
The following safety equipment should be available at the job site.
 Safety Shoes - wear at the time of construction (Standard quality that are available in Bangladesh market)
 Safety Helmet - wear at the time of construction (Standard quality that are available in Bangladesh market)
 Safety Belt - based on the task (Standard quality that are available in Bangladesh market)
 Hand Gloves - based on the task
 Eye Protection and Face shields - based on the task.
9. SAFETY PROCEDURES
9.1. Safety Measures in construction works

For construction work we have to face various types of hazards. Potential hazards for workers in
construction include:
 Falls (from heights)
 Trench collapse
 Scaffold collapse,
 Electric shock and arc flash/arc blast,
 Noise at site
 Failure to use proper personal protective equipment and
 Repetitive motion injuries
 Slips & trips
9.2. Hazards & Solutions

During construction work, the following items should be kept in mind to provide safety at site.
 Scaffolding
 Fall protection
 Excavations
 Ladders
 Head protection
 Hazard communication
 Electrical works
 Noise protection
Page 46 of 194
9.3. Discussion on hazards & Solution
9.3.1. SCAFFOLDING
Hazard:
When scaffolds are not erected or used properly, fall hazards can occur. Construction workers
frequently work on scaffolds. Protecting these workers from scaffold-related accidents we
should take care to the following measures. Fall protection should be provided where the working
area is above 6 feet or more.
Solutions:
a. Scaffold must be sound, rigid and sufficient to carry its own weight plus four times the maximum
intended load without settling or displacement. It must be erected on solid footing
b. Unstable objects, such as barrels, boxes, loose bricks or concrete blocks must not be used to
support scaffolds or planks.
c. Scaffold must not be erected, moved, dismantled or altered except under the supervision of a
competent person.
d. Scaffold must be equipped with guardrails, mid rails and toe boards.
e. Scaffold accessories such as braces, brackets, trusses, screw legs or ladders that are damaged or
weakened from any cause must be immediately repaired or replaced.
f. Scaffold platforms must be tightly planked with scaffold plank grade material or equivalent.
g. A "competent person" must inspect the scaffolding and will fill the form and at designated intervals,
re-inspect it.
h. Rigging on suspension scaffolds must be inspected by a competent person before each shift and
after any occurrence that could affect structural integrity to ensure that all connections are tight
and that no damage to the rigging has occurred since its last use.
i. Synthetic and natural rope used in suspension scaffolding must be protected from heat-producing
sources.
j. Employees must be instructed about the hazards of using diagonal braces as fall protection.
k. Scaffold can be accessed by using ladders and stairwells.
l. Scaffolds must be at least 10 feet from electric power lines at all times.
9.3.2. FALL PROTECTION

Hazard:
Each year, falls consistently account for the greatest number of fatalities in the construction
industry. A number of factors are often involved in falls, including unstable working surfaces.
The using of guardrails, fall arrest systems, safety nets, covers and restraint systems can prevent
many deaths and injuries from falls.
Solutions:
 Safety belt must be used to avoid fall
 Bamboo fence should be used in stair & roof area to avoid fall.
 Workers to be trained up to avoid fall
9.3.3. EXCAVATION
Hazard:
Trench collapses causes a lot of injuries each year.
Solutions:
 Don’t keep the excavated earth adjacent to the trench.

 If the depth of the trench is 4 feet, use ladder or other form of regress.
Page 47 of 194
 If the depth of the trench is more than 5 feet, provide protection by shoring.
 Never enter an unprotected trench.
 Always use a protective system for trenches of five feet deep or greater.
Protective Systems:
 Sloping to protect workers by cutting back the trench wall at an angle inclined away from the
excavation not steeper than a height/depth ratio of 2 :1, according to the sloping
requirements for the type of soil.
 Shielding to protect workers by using trench boxes or other types of safety measure.
 Site Engineer must take care during trench work.
 Make sure that trenches are inspected by a competent person.
9.3.4. LADDERS
Hazard:
Ladders and stairways are another source of injuries and fatalities for the construction workers.
Workers become injured due to falls on stairways and ladders.
Solutions:
 Use the correct ladder for the task.
 Have a competent person visually inspect a ladder before use for any defects such as:
Structural damage, split/bent side rails, broken or missing rungs/steps/cleats and missing or
damaged safety devices;
 Grease, dirt or other contaminants that could cause slips or falls;
 Paint or stickers (except warning labels) that could hide possible defects.
 Make sure that ladders are long enough to safely reach the work area.
 Mark or tag ("Do Not Use") damaged or defective ladders for repair or replacement, or destroy
them immediately.
 Never load ladders beyond the maximum intended load or beyond the manufacturer's rated
capacity.
 Be sure the load rating can support the weight of the user, including materials and tools.
 Do not use metallic ladders near electrical work and overhead power lines.
9.3.5. HEAD PROTECTION

Hazard:
Serious head injuries can result from blows to the head.
Solution:
Must wear helmet/ hard hats where there is a potential for objects falling from above, bumps to
their heads from fixed objects, or accidental head contact with electrical hazards.
9.3.6. HAZARD COMMUNICATION

Hazard:
Failure to recognize the hazards associated with chemicals can cause chemical burns,
respiratory problems, fires and explosions.
Solutions:
 Maintain a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each chemical in the facility. (If the
chemical is used at site)
 Make this information accessible to employees at all times in a language or formats that are
clearly understood by all affected personnel.
Page 48 of 194
 Train employees on how to read and use the MSDS.

 Follow manufacturer's MSDS instructions for handling hazardous chemicals.
 Train employees about the risks of each hazardous chemical being used.
 Provide spill clean-up kits in areas where chemicals are stored.
 Have a written spill control plan.
 Train employees to clean up spills, protect themselves and properly dispose of used
materials.
 Provide proper personal protective equipment and enforce its use.
 Store chemicals safely and securely.
9.3.7. ELECTRICAL WORKS

Hazard:
At the time of electrical works thermal burns, potential damages to eyes & electric shocks may
occur.
Solutions:
 Workers to be trained properly for electrical works
 Safety glass, hand gloves, safety shoes to be worn
 Electrical circuit breakers must be kept switched off at the area during electrical work.
10. SAFETY CHECK LISTS
The following checklists may be helpful to take steps to avoid hazards that cause injuries, illnesses and
fatalities. As always, be cautious and seek help if you are concerned about a potential hazard.
10.1. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
10.1.1. Eye and Face Protection:

 Safety glasses or face shields are worn anytime work operations can cause foreign objects
getting into the eye such as during welding, cutting, grinding, nailing (or when working with
concrete and/or harmful chemicals or when exposed to flying particles).
 Eye and face protectors are selected based on anticipated hazards. Safety glasses or face
shields are worn when exposed to any electrical hazards including work on energized
electrical systems.
10.1.2. Foot Protection:

 Construction workers should wear work shoes or boots with slip-resistant and puncture-
resistant soles.
 Safety-toed footwear is worn to prevent crushed toes when working around heavy equipment
or falling objects.
10.1.3. Hand Protection:

 Gloves should fit snugly.
 Workers wear the right gloves for the job (for example, heavy-duty rubber gloves for concrete
work, welding gloves for welding, insulated gloves and sleeves when exposed to electrical
hazards).
10.1.4. Head Protection

 Workers shall wear hard hats where there is a potential for objects falling from above, bumps
to their heads from fixed objects, or of accidental head contact with electrical hazards.
Page 49 of 194
 Hard hats are routinely inspected for dents, cracks or deterioration.

 Hard hats are replaced after a heavy blow or electrical shock.
 Hard hats are maintained in good condition.
10.1.5. Scaffolding:
 Scaffolds should be set on sound footing.
 Damaged parts that affect the strength of the scaffold are taken out of service.
 Scaffolds are not altered.
 All scaffolds should be fully planked.
 Scaffolds are not moved horizontally while workers are on them unless they are designed to
be mobile and workers have been trained in the proper procedures.
 Employees are not permitted to work on scaffolds when covered with snow, ice, or other
slippery materials.
 Scaffolds are not erected or moved within 10 feet of power lines.
 Employees are not permitted to work on scaffolds in bad weather or high winds unless a
competent person has determined that it is safe to do so.
 Ladders, boxes, buckets or other makeshift platforms are not used to raise work height.
 Extra material is not allowed to build up on scaffold platforms.
 Scaffolds should not be loaded with more weight than they were designed to support.
10.1.6. Fall protection:

 Safety belt must be used to avoid fall.
 Bamboo fence should be used in stair & roof area to avoid fall.
 Workers to be trained up to avoid fall.
10.1.7. Electrical Safety:

 Work on new and existing energized (hot) electrical circuits is prohibited until all power is
shut off and grounds are attached.
 An effective Lockout/Tag out system is in place.
 Frayed, damaged or worn electrical cords or cables are promptly replaced.
 All extension cords have grounding prongs.
 Protect flexible cords and cables from damage. Sharp corners and projections should be
avoided.
 Use extension cord sets used with portable electric tools and appliances that are the three-
wire type and designed for hard or extra-hard service.
 All electrical tools and equipment are maintained in safe condition and checked regularly for
defects and taken out of service if a defect is found.
 Do not bypass any protective system or device designed to protect employees from contact
with electrical energy.
 Overhead electrical power lines are located and identified.
 Ensure that ladders, scaffolds, equipment or materials never come within 10 feet of electrical
power lines.
 All electrical tools must be properly grounded unless they are of the double insulated type.
 Multiple plug adapters are prohibited.
10.1.8. Floor and Wall Openings:

 Floor openings (12 inches or more) are to be guarded by a secured cover, a guardrail or
equivalent on all sides (except at entrances to stairways).
 Toe boards are to be installed around the edges of permanent floor openings (where persons
may pass below the opening).
Page 50 of 194
10.1.9. Hazard Communication:

 A list of hazardous substances used in the workplace is maintained and readily available at
the worksite.
 There is a written hazard communication program addressing.
 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), labeling and employee training.
 Each container of a hazardous substance (vats, bottles, storage tanks) is labeled with product
identity and a hazard warning(s) (communicating the specific health hazards and physical
hazards).
 Material Safety Data Sheets are readily available at all times for each hazardous substance
used.
 There is an effective employee training program for hazardous substances
Page 51 of 194
FORM 01:
SAFETY TRAINING FORM
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Contractor Name :
Project Title :
Contract Number:
Date of Training :
Name of Trainer:
Designation:
Short Description on Training :
___________________ _______________________
Contractor Engineer Consultant Engineer
Page 52 of 194
FORM 02 :
SAFETY INSPECTION MONITORING:
Name Position Signature
___________________ _______________________
Page 53 of 194
FORM 03 :
DAILY SAFETY RECORD FORM
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Contractor Name :
Project Title :
Contract Number:
Date of Inspection :
Record keeping by :
Designation:
Page 54 of 194
Type of Work on date :
Location :
Safety measure taken :
PPE Used :
8 am : 11 am : 2 pm : 5 pm :
Workers Health Condition :
8 am : 11 am : 2 pm : 5 pm :
___________________ _______________________
Page 55 of 194
FORM 04:
Safety Performance Evaluation Form
Contractor Name
Project Title:
Contract Number: Date of Inspection:
Record keeping by: Designation:
Name
S of 1st week 2nd week 3rd week 4th week Remarks
l workers
A B C A B C A B C A B C
A= Excellent B= Good C= Satisfactory
___________________ _______________________
Page 56 of 194
FORM 05 :
INCIDENT REPORT FORM
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Contractor Name :
Project Title :
Contract Number:
Incident Date :
Incident time :
Affected person(s):
Summery and cause of incident :
Recommended corrective action :
___________________ _______________________
Page 57 of 194
FORM 06 :
Scaffolding Inspection Form
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--
Contractor Name :
Project Title :
Contract Number:
Date of Inspection :
Inspected by :
Location of Scaffolding:
Designation:
Condition of Scaffolding Material : Damaged/ Good
Binding at joint: Loose/Tight/ Good enough
Support on ground: Weak/ Strong/ Good enough
Comments: Scaffolding can be used/Cannot be used
___________________ _______________________
Page 58 of 194
CHAPTER 02: CIVIL WORKS
2.1. EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION

2.1.1. DESCRIPTION
The work under this item shall consist of setting out of true lines for all foundations of structures,
performing the excavations in any kind of soil encountered, up to the required depth as per drawings
and instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge. Removing the soils and back filling to original ground
lines as provided in these specifications.
The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the furnishing of all materials and equipment
and performing all operations necessary for and properly incidental to accomplishing all excavating,
removal of surplus materials away from site, compacting, back-filling, and grading work, and
trenching and back-filling for utilities as necessary to complete the project as shown and noted on
the drawings and specified herein.
2.1.2. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer-in-Charge for a sufficient time to advance the beginning of
excavation so that the elevations and measurements may be taken from the existing ground. Any
materials removed or excavated before taking these measurements will not be paid for.
The foundation pits and trenches shall be excavated by regular stages according to the out-lines
of the footings / mat as shown in the Plans and shall be of sufficient size to permit the placing of
the full widths and lengths of the footings raft shown, with full horizontal beds. Rounded or
undercut corners and edges of footings will not be permitted. All loose and displaced material shall
be removed at the Contractor’s expenses, leaving a smooth solid bed to receive foundation. The
depth of excavation would be 3 m or more if necessary, from the existing ground level.
Where unstable soil is encountered at the bed level, it should be brought to the notice of Engineer-
in-Charge and all such unstable soil shall be removed as directed and replaced with suitable
material to provide adequate support for the structure.
Any erroneous excavations made below the level shown on the plans or below the levels ordered
by the Engineer-in-Charge will not be paid for and shall be brought back to the specified levels
with mass concrete at the Contractor’s own expenses.
Excavation shall be sufficiently large to provide for necessary working space, shuttering and any
other temporary works required during construction.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety and stability of the excavations and shall
provide protective supports, bracing, sheet piles, shoring etc. as required and maintain proper
drainage. Shoring should be adequate enough to provide sufficient safety of all the adjacent
structures and land.
If required de-watering of the excavated area has to be done by installing suitable pumping units.
Pumping from the interior of any foundation enclosure shall be done in such a manner as to
preclude the possibility of any portion of the concrete material being carried away. No pumping
will be permitted during placing of the concrete, or for a period of at least 24 hours thereafter unless
it be done from a suitable sump separated from the concrete work by a watertight wall.
Page 61 of 194
All spaces excavated for and not occupied by structure shall be refilled up to the “original ground
line: which expression shall mean the surface of the ground before excavation was made for the
structure.
No back fill shall be placed against any structure without prior permission of the Engineer-in-Charge
in general, no structure shall be subjected to the pressure of back filling until three (3) days after
expiration of the period designated for removal of forms. This period shall be extended if subnormal
curing conditions exist.
Back filling around and over structures shall be deposited evenly on all sides in layer not exceeding
150 mm (6 inches). Each layer shall be compacted by hand or mechanical tampers to a density
equal to or greater than that required for adjacent area.
Back fill shall be of approved material that will produce a dense and well-compacted filling. The
material shall be free from large lumps, organic or other extraneous materials. Excavated material
may be used for back fill if certified to be satisfactory by the Engineer-in-Charge, All timber, trash
and temporary works shall be removed before back filling. Spoils and excavated earth from the
excavation shall be disposed of within the specified time as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
2.1.3. APPLICABLE STANDARDS:
2.1.3.1. Pertinent provisions of the following listed current reference standards shall apply
to the work of this section, except as they may be modified herein, and are hereby
made a part of this specification to the extent required.
2.1.3.2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) :
D1556 Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method.
D1557 Test for Moisture Density Relations of Soils, using 10 pound Hammer and
18 inch Drop.
2.1.4. MATERIALS:
2.1.4.1. Fill Materials

All soil or granular materials placed to raise the natural grade of the site or to backfill excavation.
2.1.4.2. On site Material

Soil or granular material which is obtained from the required excavation on the site bounded by
the property limits.
2.1.4.3. Imported Material

Soil or granular material which is hauled in from off-site areas.
2.1.4.4. Select Material

On Site and/ or imported material which is approved by the Engineer’s Representative for use as
mechanical fill.
2.1.4.5. Compacted Fill

Fill upon which the Engineer’s Representative has made sufficient observations and tests to
determine and confirm that the fill has been placed and compacted in accordance with the
specification requirements.
Page 62 of 194
2.1.4.6. Degree of Compaction

The ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the dry density of the fill material as compacted in the
field to the maximum dry density of the same material as determined by ASTM Test Designation
D1557 above.
2.1.5. INSPECTION AND TESTING
 All site preparation, cutting and shaping, excavating, filling, and back-filling shall be carried out
under the inspection and control of the Engineer’s Representative’s Representative, who will
perform appropriate field and laboratory tests to evaluate the suitability of fill material, the
proper moisture content for compaction, and the degree of compaction achieved. Any fill that
does not meet the specification, requirements shall be removed and/or re-compacted until the
requirements are satisfied.
 Cutting and shaping, excavating, conditioning, filling and compacting procedures require
approval of the Engineer’s Representative as they are successively performed. Any work found
unsatisfactory or any work disturbed by subsequent operations before approval is granted
shall be corrected in an approved manner as directed by the Engineer’s Representative.
 Tests for compaction will be made in accordance with test procedures outlined in ASTM
D1557(C), as applicable. Field testing of soils or compacted fill in place shall conform with the
applicable requirements of ASTM D1556.
2.1.6. WEATHER CONDITIONS
 Fill material shall not be placed, spread or rolled during unfavorable weather conditions. When
the work is interrupted by rain, fill operations shall not be resumed until field test by the
Engineer’s Representative indicates that the moisture content and density of the fill area as
specified in these specifications, or are in condition suitable enough, in the opinion of the
Engineer’s Representative, for resuming the work.
 The control of water throughout the duration of this Contract shall be the sole responsibility of
the Contractor. Control Methods shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer’s
Representative including the Contractor's equipment, plans, methods and installation
procedures, etc.
2.1.7. SOIL MATERIALS

All material to be used for mechanical fill and backfill shall be an inert, non-expansive soil (less
than 50 percent passing a No. 100 Standard sieve), free from vegetable matter and other
deleterious substances, and of such quality that it will compact thoroughly without the presence
of excessive voids when watered and rolled. Fill material shall not contain rocks or lumps over 4
inch in greatest dimension. All fill material to be used under the building, slabs, pavement, and
structures and backfill shall be on-site and/or imported material, conforming to the above, with
a liquid limit less than 30 and a plasticity index less than 15. Excavated on-site material will be
considered suitable for compacted fill if it is free from organic matter and other deleterious
substances and conforms to the requirements specified above.
The Engineer’s Representative shall be notified at least one week prior to the start of filling and
back-filling operations so that he may select for approval samples of the material intended to be
Page 63 of 194
used for filling and back-filling. No material shall be placed without the approval of the Engineer’s
Representative.
2.1.7.2. On-Site Material

Excavated earth material which is suitable for compacted fill or backfill, as determined by the
Engineer’s Representative, shall be conditioned for reuse and properly stockpiled as directed for
later filling and back- filling operations. Conditioned material shall be free of debris and rubble.
All rocks and aggregate, exceeding 4 inch in the largest dimension, and deleterious materials
shall be removed and disposed off in a manner as specified herein the specifications.
2.1.7.3. Imported Material

Where conditions require the fill material to be imported the material shall be a granular soil totally
free of organic matter and shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements specified above have
to be selected. In addition, imported material may consist of pit-run sand or sand-gravel mixture
with a maximum size of 3 inch and with not more than 5 percent passing a No. 200 U.S. Standard
sieve (wet sieve).
2.1.7.4. Sand
Sand for compacted sand fill under concrete footings, foundations, slabs, and/or brick soling, or
for aggregate drainage fill, shall be a clean and graded, all passing a No. 4 U.S. Standard sieve,
and conforming generally to ASTM C33 for fine aggregate, with fineness modulus not be less
than 1.20 or as determined by the Engineer’s Representative.
2.1.8. STAKES AND GRADES
Contractor shall lay out his work, establish all necessary marks, bench marks, grading stakes, and
other stakes as required, all as specified herein the specifications.
Finished elevation for work to be constructed under this contract are indicated on the drawings,
and, unless an inconsistency therein is brought to the attention of the Engineer’s Representative in
writing prior to commencement of construction, the Contractor will be held responsible for the
proper location and elevation of all work.
2.1.9. EXCAVATION
 Excavation for foundations, pits, trenches, footings, floor slabs, concrete walks, roadway
pavements, parking areas and aprons, and any other structures indicated as well as common
excavation for grading purposes, shall be to the lines and levels required. The bottoms of all
trenches shall be to grade, tamped firm, clean and free from all debris or foreign matter.
 Excavations shall be kept free from water at all times. Adequate equipment shall be maintained
at the site in accordance with 5 above.
 If material below and beyond the required dimensions has been removed or disturbed due to
unauthorized over excavation or for any other reason, the space shall be placed, filled and
compacted with select material, as directed by the Engineer’s Representative, with no
additional cost to the Employer.
 Excavated earth material which is suitable for compacted fill or backfill, as determined by the
Engineer’s Representative, shall be conditioned for re-use and properly stockpiled for later use
as hereinbefore specified under "Soil Materials".
Page 64 of 194
 Abandoned sewers, piping, and other utilities encountered in the progress of excavating, shall
be removed and the ends plugged with concrete or in any other manner which is acceptable
to the Engineer’s Representative.
 Active sewers, water and gas pipes, electric power, light or telephone poles, conduits, or wires,
and any other active utility lines encountered, shall be immediately reported to the Engineer’s
Representative and authorities involved. The owner and proper authorities shall be allowed free
access to take that measures they may deem necessary to repair, relocate, or remove the
obstruction as determined by the owner's representative to the satisfaction of the Engineer’s
Representative.
 All debris and excess earth materials shall be removed from the site and disposed off as
specified elsewhere this Specification.
 Open excavations, trenches, and the like shall be protected with fences, barricades, covers,
and railings as required to maintain safe personnel and vehicular traffic passage. Freshly
graded surfaces shall be protected from erosion until such time as permanent drainage and
erosion control works have been installed.
2.2. TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES
2.2.1. TRENCHING
Trenches shall be excavated to the lines, grades, and dimensions indicated on the drawings.
Maximum allowable width of trench, measured at the top of the pipe, shall be the outside diameter
of the pipe plus 18 inch, to the outside of any trench bracing. Minimum width shall be according
to the Manufacturer's recommendations for type of pipe being used. However, the minimum shall
not be less than the outside diameter of the pipe plus 4 inch.
Trenching shall include the removal of all material or obstruction of any nature, the installation and
removal of all sheeting and bracing, and the control of water, as necessary to construct the works
as shown. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, excavation for pipe lines shall be by open
cut. Crossing pipelines shall be protected by using hand excavation or as directed by the Engineer’s
Representative.
Excess and undesirable materials shall be disposed off as specified in the Specification.
When the bedding material encountered is mud, or other unstable material, the bed shall be made
firm and solid by removing stated unstable material and replacing same with sand, or other
approved material, compacted to at least 90 percent.
Where water is encountered in the trench, free draining sand shall be used as required to drain the
water and provide stable bedding.
Bell holes shall be accurately placed and shall not be larger than reasonably required to make the
joint.
Jetting will not be permitted.
Page 65 of 194
2.2.2. BACK-FILLING
The pipe trench shall be back-filled as indicated on the drawings. All backfill material shall be
compacted in 6 inch lifts to at least 90 percent. To prevent damage, the utmost care shall be
exercised in placing the initial layers of backfill around and over the pipe. The work shall meet with
the approval of the Engineer’s Representative. If required, to prevent the pipe from floating out of
position, the water in the trench shall be sufficiently low, or the pipe shall be sufficiently weighted
so that the net load on the pipe is downward. Back-filling at catch basins, manholes, and similar
structures shall conform to "Back-filling" hereinafter specified.
2.2.3. COMPACTED FILL
2.2.3.1. Sand
Sand for compacted sand fill or drainage fill shall be the clean and graded sand herein before
specified under "Soil Materials".

All material used for compacted fill shall be selected material as herein before specified under
"Soil Materials". Clean and graded sand will also meet the requirements for select material. No
material shall be placed without the approval of the Engineer’s Representative.
2.2.3.3. Placing and Compacting

a. Sand and select material shall be spread uniformly in layers not to exceed 6 inch in depth
before compaction. Material which does not contain sufficient moisture to compact properly
shall be sprinkled with water; if it contains excess moisture it shall be aerated or permitted to dry
to the proper water content. Sand and select material shall be uniformly mixed with any added
water before being compacted. Each layer of spread sand and select material shall be compacted
to at least 90 percent except as specified in (b) below :
b. Degree of compaction: The upper 300 mm of sand fill under foundations, and slabs shall be
compacted to 95 percent using modified proctor. The upper 300 mm of compacted fill under
roadways, parking areas, aprons, and other brick paving where indicated shall also be
compacted to 95 percent.
2.2.3.4. Control of Fill

Control of fill shall consist of field inspection and testing to determine that each layer has been
compacted to the required density. Any layer or portion of layer that does not attain the
compaction required shall be scarified and compacted until the required density is obtained.
2.2.3.5. Surplus Excavated Material

Surplus excavated material, if any, shall be removed from the site and disposed of as specified
in this Specification.
2.2.4. COMMON FILL
Where pits, holes, low spots, or depressions are required to be filled or back-filled in order to bring
the finish grade to the grades and elevations indicated on the drawings, and where structures are
not involved, the fill material shall be suitable on site or imported material which contains no more
than 10 percent by volume of organic material. Common fill requires approval of the Engineer’s
Representative before it may be used.
Page 66 of 194
Common fill shall be spread uniformly in layers not to exceed 12 inch before compaction.
Compaction shall be 85 percent. If required to be moistened or dried, follow the procedures herein
before specified for compacted fill.
2.2.5. BACK FILLING
Back filling shall not be placed against footings or building walls or other structures until approved
by the Engineer’s Representative.
Back-fill material shall consist of select material as herein before specified for compacted fill.
Back-fill shall be placed in 150 mm depth in one layer, leveled, rammed, and tamped in place.
Jetting shall not be permitted; excessive pudding will not be permitted. Compaction of all layers
shall be 90 percent.
Use of the Mechanical Compactor (plate compactor) is mandatory specially for compacting the
filling in the plinth level and below road / foot path .
Hand made tools for frequent field checking of the degree of compaction will be used contractor
should fabricate such tools and keep one in every site. Sketch for such tools will be supplied by
the Engineer’s Representative.
2.2.6. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
All excavation shall be measured between the vertical planes of outside of structures and no
allowance shall be made for the extra excavation for working space, etc.
2.2.7. BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for excavation will be made at the contract unit price per cubit metre (cum) measured as
provided above which price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labour, equipment
and materials, including setting out of pits and trenches establishing and securing bench marks,
excavating, handling of excavated materials, back filling and compacting of the same, shoring, de-
watering and disposing of surplus excavated materials by hauling to any distance at approved
locations inside the site, as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work according o the
applicable plans.
Page 67 of 194
2.3. PILE FOUNDATION WORKS (CAST-IN-SITU)
2.3.1. GENERAL:
These specifications covered under this part of tender are based on the following two methods:
1. By direct mud circulation using Bentonite as slurry fluid
2. Conventional Bored and Cast Pile
The specifications for method No. 1 described in Chapter: 01 and for method No.2 are described
in Chapter-02. The general specifications for both the methods are described in Chapter-3.
CHAPTER-01 : SPECIFICATIONS FOR DIRECT MUD CIRCULATING USING BENTONITE AS SLURRY

FLUID.
Description of Piles
The piles shall be bored (by direct mud circulation method using Bentonite as Drilling fluid) cast-in-place
reinforced concrete piles with nominal diameter of 900 mm or 36 inch for service pile and 600mm or 24
inch for shore pile. The nominal diameter piles is defined as the outside diameter of the temporary guide
pipe which is used to carry out the boring and which is later on withdrawn as described hereinafter.
Advancement of Guide Pipe:

The guide pipe shall be installed at the surfaces and thereafter boring shall be executed by means of a
chisel attached at the end of API rods. The bore-hole shall be filled with drilling slurry, which circulates
through the API rods and the chisel at the base. The slurry shall flow up along the side of the bore-holes
and cutting are removed to the surface where they are separated from the slurry by de-condition and the
use of a de-sander. The same slurry after removed to the cutting may re-circulated. Because of high
viscosity (specific gravity being 1.2 to 1.3) the slurry stabilizes the side of the bore hole and in addition
the hydrostatic head due to higher specific gravity does not allow the bore-hole to collapse, and also the
back flow of water into the bore-hole is avoided. Further the bentonite forms a thin film on the side and
acts as a further protection against caving-in. For preparing the slurry only good quality bentonite shall
be used and whenever the viscosity of slurry shall drop due to concentration of cuttings in the slurry,
additional bentonite shall be added to maintain the requisite viscosity. Once the bore-hole has been drilled
down to the final depth, fresh bentonite slurry from a reserve tank shall be pumped through the bore-hole
for approximately 10 minutes so that the previous contaminated slurry is completely removed and the
bore-hole is also thoroughly cleaned and all the cuttings from the base are removed. Only when the bore-
hole is completely filled with fresh slurry free from all cuttings the circulation of fresh bentonite shall be
stopped.
Concrete of Bore-Holes
a. Mixing Proportions:
The most reliable results in concreting under water in a confined space are obtained when the slump of
concrete being deposited in controlled within the limits of between 4 and 5 inches for standard slump
cone. The mix proportions shall consequently be established as follows: First a standard mix of I : I.5: 3
shall be established by trial for placing concrete in the dry stipulated in the specifications for the civil
works for a concrete strength of 24 MPa (3500 psi) at 28 days measured on cylinder. This will result in
a certain proportion of cement in the dry mix, a water/cement ratio and proportion of cement in the dry
mix, a water/cement ratio and certain slump which will be less than 75mm. Then the amount of water in
Page 68 of 194
the mix shall be increased to achieve a slump of 125mm. Finally the amount of cement in the dry mix
shall be increased so as to maintain that constant water/cement ratio for the greater quality of water used
but in any case by not less than 20% (twenty percent) in comparison to standard mix.
b. Placing:
The piles shall be concreted by means of the 'contractor' method using tremie pipes. The 200mm dia
tremie pipes shall be placed in the bore-hole so that they are about 1 ft above the base of the hole. A
funnel shall be fixed on top of the tremie pipes and concrete shall be introduced into the funnel by means
of concrete will flow through the funnel and the tremie pipes to the bottom of the bore-holes and from
there it will rise up in the borehole itself flowing out of the base of the tremie pipes. It shall be ensured
that the 200mm dia pipes are always at least 1800mm to 2400mm within the concrete, so that the fresh
concrete is always added in the concrete, and in this way the concrete will rise to the surface and
concreting of the pile completed.
End of Concreting
As concreting proceeds, the level of the slurry will rise in the guide pipe and/or flow through the top of
guide pipe, concreting shall continue until it has reached an elevation 1m higher than the soffit of future
pile cap.
Payment
No separate payment will be made for the work covered in this section of the specifications, and all costs
in connection therewith shall be included in the item rate of the contract for the appropriate item to which
this work pertains.
CHAPTER-02 : SPECIFICATIONS FOR COVENTIONAL BORED-CAST-IN-PLACE
Description of Pile
The piles shall be bored-cast-in-place, reinforced concrete piles with a nominal diameter of 36” or 900mm
and 24” or 600mm. The nominal diameter of the piles is defined as the outside diameter of the temporary
driving casing which is used to carry out the boring to the elevation required and which is later withdrawn,
all as described hereinafter.
Advancement of Casing
The Contractor may use any percussion, rotary or vibration method. or any combination thereof, for
advancing the temporary outer casing to the elevation required but the use of water jets or of any other
method or methods for the advancement of the casing which tend to disintegrate or to appreciably loosen
the soil strata surrounding the casing is expressly prohibited. The casing shall penetrate to the bottom of
the bore-hole and shall not be withdrawn except as stipulated hereinafter.
Removal of Soil
The soil inside the casing shall be removed by auguring or some similar method. It is expressly prohibited
to pump out or to attempt to pump out the water in the casing or to use pumping or water jetting to assist
with the removal of soil or any other materials from the casing.
'
Top of the Casing
In the last stages of the concreting operations described hereinafter the top of the casing shall be at a
elevation of not less than 1m above that of the soffit of the future pile caps, for the purpose of making it
possible to continue concreting upto that elevation, all as stipulated hereinafter.
Page 69 of 194
Concreting
The Contractor shall have the choice of two alternative methods for concreting the piles, each subject to
the relevant provision stipulated hereunder:
This method consists essentially in lower grouting tubes to the bottom of the boring filling the boring with
coarse and medium aggregates with or without sand and pumping cement grout, with or without sand,
through the grouting tubes which are gradually withdrawn. Some aspects of this method are subject to
patent rights and Contractors washing to use it must comply with the provisions of governing the use of
patented construction methods. This method shall only be used with the prior approval in writing by the
Engineer-in-charge/Consultant and shall than be subject to the following specifications:
a. Pre-Packing of Aggregates:
The aggregates shall not be dropped into the casing but shall be carefully lowered to the bottom and
deposited at the bottom by means of appropriately designed buckets or skips or by means of a chute
extending all the way to the bottom, and gradually withdrawn to which the aggregates should be conveyed
without interruption, all in a manner calculated to avoid segregation of the aggregates. The aggregates
shall conform with specifications laid down for civil works. The casing shall be completely filled with
aggregates upto an elevation 1m higher than the soffit of the future pile cap.
b. Grouting without Sand :

If the aggregates deposited in the boring already contain the requisite proportion of sand then the grout
used shall contain no sand but shall be a smooth water-cement grout similar in all respects to the water-
cement grout. The water-cement ratio used shall be 0.40. This grout shall be mixed in a high speed double
cylinder grout mixer and shall be pumped by a high pressure pump.
c. Grouting with Sand :

If the contractor prefers not to incorporate sand in the aggregates deposited in the boring before grouting,
then the requisite amount of sand shall be incorporated in the grout. The water/cement ration used for
this grout shall be 0.40 as above but the mixing pumping equipment and the diameter of the grout tubes
shall be adjusted accordingly.
d. Rate of Grouting:
The Contractor shall calculate the volume of grout required to fill one linear foot of pile and shall
progressively withdraw the grouting tubes in such a manner that, except at the beginning of the operation,
the bottom of the grout tubes is never less that 900mm below the top of the grout level in the casing. The
speed of grouting shall be not less than 9 linear meter of pile per hour and not more than 15 linear meter
of pile per hour. Once the grouting operation has commenced it must proceed uninterruptedly to
completion. if grouting is interrupted for more than 10(ten) minutes for any reason, the pile shall be
condemned without recourse.
e. End of Grouting:
As grouting proceeds, the level of the water in the casing will rise and/or overflow the top of the casing.
Grouting shall be continued until all the aggregates are completely covered with undiluted grout.
Concreting Under Water:

This method shall be subject to the following specifications in addition to those mentioned for the civil
work.
a. Aggregates:
The aggregates shall conform with the specifications for civil works.
Page 70 of 194
b. Mix Proportions:
The most reliable results in concreting under water in a confined space, followed by early withdrawal of
the protective casing, are obtained when the slump of the concrete being deposited is controlled within
the limits or between 3 and 4 inches for a standard slump cone. The mix proportions shall consequently
be established as follows:
First a standard mix of 1:1.5:3 shall be established by trial for placing concrete in the dry as stipulated in
the Specifications for civil works for a concrete strength of 3000 psi to 3500 psi at 28 days measured on
a cylinder. This will result in a certain proportion of cement in the dry mix, a certain water/cement ratio
and a certain slump which will be less than 75mm. Then, the amount of water in the mix shall be increased
so as to achieve a slump of 125mm. Finally, the amount of cement in the dry mix shall be increased so
as to maintain a constant water/cement ratio for the greater quantity of water used but in any case be not
less than 20% (twenty percent) in comparison to the standard mix.
c. Placing:
The concrete shall be placed by means of a skip lowered and raised inside the reinforcement cage by
means of a crane, or other appropriate mechanical means. The capacity of the skip shall be equal to that
of the mixer. The outer dimensions of the skip shall be such that it can be freely lowered and raised inside
the reinforcement cage and the manner of lowering raising it shall be so controlled that the reinforcement
cage is not distorted or displaced in the course of concreting.
The bottom of the skip shall be of a conical or appropriate pyramidal shape to enable it to easily penetrate
into the previously deposited concrete by a distance of not less than 300mm, and it shall be fitted with
an automatic or manually operated device for opening the discharge trap when the skip has achieved that
penetration. To ensure the satisfactory placing of concrete in this manner, the skip should be allowed to
accelerate or even to drop freely near the bottom of its course whereas the withdrawal of the skip should
be gradual in order to ensure that all the concrete in the skip is in fact deposited well below the level of
the fresh concrete in the casing.
The success of this method of concreting requires an experienced and concessions skip operator as well
as a competent engineering, supervision and the Engineer- in-charge/Consultant shall satisfy himself on
these points before allowing the contractor to proceed with this work.
d. Rate of placing:
The rate of placing concrete shall be such that the casing is filled with concrete at a rate of not less than
9m per hour and not more than 15m per hour.
e. Compacting:
With the method of placing described above and using concrete with a slump of 75 to 100mm, no
compaction other than the impact of the skip is necessary and none shall be allowed because of the
danger of mixing in extraneous matter with the concrete.
f. End of Concreting:
As concreting proceeds, the level of the water in the casing will rise and or overflow through the top of
the casing. Concreting shall continue until the concrete has reached an elevation 1m higher than the soffit
of the future pile cap.
Withdrawal of Temporary Casing

The withdrawal of the temporary casing is a critical operation affecting the soundness of bored cast-in-
place reinforced concrete piles. Two conditions are essential for the success of this operation:
Page 71 of 194
Firstly: the direction of withdrawal must be in the most strict alignment with the actual direction of the
casing in ground
Secondly : the timing of the withdrawal and the method used for the withdrawal of the casing must be
such as not disturb the freely cast concrete in the piles.
Whereas pre-packing methods are used, the withdrawal of the casing where pre-packing methods are
used, the withdrawal of the casing should be continuous or almost continuous operation proceeding
simultaneously with grouting in such a manner that the bottom of the casing still in the ground is always
not less than 6 feet and preferably not more than 3.5m below the end of grouting tubes.
Irrespective of the methods used, the technically satisfactory withdrawal of the casing requires, adequate
equipment, an experienced and conscientious operator and competent engineering supervision, and the
Contractor shall not be allowed to proceed with this work until the Engineer-in-charge is satisfied with the
adequacy of the Contractor's equipment and with the proficiency of his personnel. The most usual cause
of unsatisfactory performance is that the Contractor's equipment might prove to be insufficiently powerful
to achieve withdrawal of the casing by a steady pull so that the contractor is faced with choice of either
abandoning the casing in the bore-hole or attempting to withdraw it by jerking. Jerky withdrawal of the
casing, particularly if delayed by breakdowns or mishaps, disturbs the freshly deposited concreted and
may grossly impair the strength of the pile. It is consequently expressly stipulated that the Contractor
shall not be allowed to proceed with this work until the Engineer-in-charge is satisfied that all his
equipment, including all component parts thereof such as tripods, pulleys, blocks, ropes, hooks, winches
and all other sundries, are sufficiently power full and study to ensure the satisfactory progress of this
work without mishaps and difficulties.
Payment
No separate payment will be made for the work covered under this section of the specifications, and all
costs in connection therewith shall be included in the item rate of the contract for the appropriate item to
which this work pertains.
CHAPTER-03 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOTH METHODS
(Described in Chapter-01 & 02)
Description of Piles:
The length of piles is estimated to be 60 to 80 feet below the natural ground level. Depending on the
results of pile-loading test described later under this section and depending also on supplementary soil
information obtained in the course of execution of the actual pile work, the Engineer-in-charge may at his
own discretion order the contractor to vary the penetration of some of all the piles as the case may be.
Limitation of Boring Sequence

No boring operations shall take place nearer than 10 ft from any pile for which concreting operations are
in progress or from any newly completed pile until at least two days have elapsed from the last concrete
operation on that pile.
Sample and Boring Logs

Two soil samples shall be taken from the bottom 300mm in each bore-hole and shall be preserved in
sealed and adequately labeled glass until personally inspected by the Engineer-in-Charge/ Consultant who
shall then issue instructions regarding the further disposal of these samples.
Page 72 of 194
Tolerances
The out-of-position tolerance shall not exceed 75mm in any direction. The out-of-plumb tolerance shall
not exceed 1% (one percent) in any direction.
The bow shall not exceed 50mm in any direction. In order to control the amount of bow in the piles, exact
records shall be kept of the amount of out-of-plumb of each bore-hole and the withdrawal of the casing
or guide pipe shall be in strict alignment therewith.
Inspection
After the boring has reached its final penetration as stipulated or as may be additionally ordered by the
Engineer-in-charge/Consultant on the basis of the test load results and other data obtained in the field,
and after it has been completely cleaned of all earth and otherwise made ready to receive the
reinforcement and thereafter the concrete, the Contractor shall so inform the Engineer-in-
charge/Consultant. The Engineer-in-charge/ Consultant or his duly authorized Representative, shall check
the actual penetration achieved, the cleanness of the bore-hole and the amounts and directions, if any,
by which the bore-hole is out of position and/or out of plumb and having satisfied himself on these and
on any other points which he may consider relevant, shall personally sign an acceptance voucher for the
bore-hole authorizing the Contractor to proceed with placing the reinforcement. The Contractor shall under
no circumstances proceed with placing the reinforcement in the bore-hole, or with the subsequent
concreting, without having first obtained this written authority signed separately for each and every bore-
hole by the Engineer-in-charge/Consultant or his Representative duly authorized specifically for this
purpose.
Pile Reinforcement
The reinforcement for the piles shall be of 60 grade deformed bars having fy = 414 MPa (60 Ksi as per
design conforming to ASTM Specification A615.
The reinforcement for each pile shall be assembled on the ground and securely tied by means of binding
wire in such a manner as to form a rigid cage concrete spacer blocks specially pre-cast for this purpose
shall be securely attached to the reinforcement at a suitable spacing in such a manner as to ensure that
the concrete cover is maintained throughout and the reinforcement cage is not displaced in the casing in
the course of the subsequent concreting operations. Most particular care shall be taken to ensure that
none of these spacer blocks can swivel around to the inside of the reinforcement cage and that, in general,
there are no obstructions of any kind inside the reinforcement cage due to spacer blocks or lapped
reinforcement or any other reason, which might interfere with the smooth travel of the concreting skip if
the underwater method of concreting described in section P02 is to be used. The entire reinforcement
cage assembly shall then be carefully lifted and carefully lowered into the bore-hole previously made
ready to receive it as described in previous section.
Should the Contractor prefer to lower the reinforcement cage assembly into the bore-hole in 2 or 3
sections, he may be so provided he observes the some lapping requirements as for assembly on the
ground, namely that the main longitudinal reinforcement shall be lapped for not less than 40 bar diameters
and the spiral reinforcement shall be double over these laps as approved by the reinforcement shall be
double over these laps as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. In addition, concrete spacer blocks must
be located immediately below and immediately above the laps at three points spaced around the cage so
as to ensure the concrete positioning of the reinforcement cage in the bore-hole.
Page 73 of 194
For direct mud circulation method when bore-holes have been thoroughly cleaned and fresh bentonite
slurry circulated for approximately 10 to 15 minutes, the reinforcement cage then shall be introduced into
the bore-hole.
Upon completion of this operation, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer-in-chare or his duly authorized
representative who shall satisfy himself of the adequacy of this work and shall then issue to the contractor,
separately for each and every pile, a written authorization to proceed with concreting.
Pile Tops
It has been stipulated that, the level of the concrete in the piles at the end of the concreting operations
must not be less than 3 ft. higher than the soffit elevation of the future pile cap. The concrete in the top
mist portion of bored or drilled cast-in-place reinforced concrete piles is never fully satisfactory. The top
portions of the piles shall be inspected by the Engineer-in-charge or his representative duly authorized for
this purpose, and the contractor shall then break back the concrete in the top portion of the piles to the
final elevation of the top of the piles which is three inches above the soffit of the future pile-caps, at the
same time also exposing the length of pile reinforcement required for lapping and bond within the pile-
cap. The Contractor shall check and record the actual final elevations of the broken-off tops of piles
against previously established benchmark and the tolerance for this final elevation shall not be great than
plus or minus I inch. The Contractor shall also establish and record the actual coordinates of the centers
of the broken-off pile tops with respect to the theoretical centre lines of each pile cap as shown on the
drawings, and the tolerance in this respect shall not exceed three includes in any direction as stipulated
hereinbefore.
The unsatisfactory concrete in the top portions of some or all piles may extend further down than the final
elevation of the tops of the piles. In that event the Contractor shall break back such greater lengths of
such piles as may be ordered by the Engineer-in-charge and shall build up such piles to the final elevations
required by means of reinforced concrete pedestal with dimension as required. Should defective concrete
or other defects extend to a depth endangering the load bearing capacity of pile, the Engineer-in-charge
may order such further remedial measures as he may see fit, including the provision of additional piles,
which may also require extension of the pile caps, all of which shall be at the Contractor's expense.
If is brought to the notice of the Contractors that payment for all piling work shall be only as stipulated in
the Schedule of Quantities, that is to say, the Contractor shall be paid only for the actual length of piles in
place measured from the soffit of the pile-caps, and that no payment shall be made either for the
demolished upper portions of piles as described above or for any reconstruction, substitution, extension
or other extras, wastage or spillage which the Contractor may incur in executing the work to the complete
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
Load Test
The Load Test stipulated herein is intended for the purpose of providing in the field that the penetration of
piles is adequate to obtain an ultimate load bearing capacity of the piles of not less than twice the design
value. A secondary objective of this pile loading test is to establish whether any significant pile settlements
are likely to occur upto the design load values.
Location of Test Pile

The Test Pile shall be located as instructed in the field by the Engineer-in-Charge/ Consultant as being
one or two of the piles under the columns.
Page 74 of 194
Time of Testing
Not less than 21 (twenty one) days shall elapse between the end of all concreting operations on the
testing pile and the application of any test loads.
Method of loading
The apparatus and methods for the application of test load must be capable of applying known vertical
loads to the top of the test pile without inducing any horizontal thrust, twist or movement in the pile. Full
details of the proposed apparatus and methods shall be submitted by the contractor to the Engineer-in-
Charge/ Consultant for prior approval. The suggested method of applying loads is by jacking against a
box of platform resulting on cribbing constructed over the top of the pile and loaded with suitable Kent-
ledge with a total weight of not less than twice the design value. Loading apparatus and methods requiring
anchored reaction members will also be allowed provided only that the anchored reaction members are
located at a sufficient distance from the test pile so as not to affect the results of the tests not to interfere
with any of the permanent works.
The purpose of the load test is not only to determine the ultimate bearing capacity of the pile but also to
obtain information on settlements and other aspects of the behavior of the pile which may lead to an
adjustment of the penetration specified for the permanent piles in the foundations. The test loading shall,
therefore, be applied in cycles as stipulated below and the following definitions shall apply.
Noticeable settlement shall mean settlement of 0.3mm.
Failure of the pile is defined conventionally when any one or more of the following conditions concur:
 As sudden settlement of 7.5mm or more,

 Continuing noticeable settlements (0.3mm or more) in any 2 hours period under constant load not
stopping within 96 hours,
 A settlement of 0.3mm in any 8 hrs period continuing at a constant rate under constant load for a period
of 96 hours or more.
The time sequence for applying load increments and for reducing the test load in stipulated
excrements as shown below, shall be as follows:
For all load decrements the time intervals shall be as shown below:
For load increments that time intervals shall be as shown below but each test load shall remain in place
until there is no noticeable settlement in a 2 hours period, whichever is the longer period;
Page 75 of 194
FIRST CYCLE OF LOADING

Starting with 'No-load' Conditions
Apply 20 tons
Wait 2 hours (or more, see above)
Apply 20 tons
Wait 2 hours or, more
Apply 20 tons
Apply 20 tons
Apply 40 tons
END OF FIRST CYCLE OF LOADING

S E C O N D C Y CL E OF L O A D IN G
Starting with a 40 Tons Load
Apply 20 tons
Apply 20 tons
Apply 20 tons
Apply 20 tons
Page 76 of 194
END OF SECOND CYCLE OF LOADING

THIRD CYCLE OF LOADING
Starting with a 80 Tons Load
Apply 20 tons
Apply 20 tons
Apply 20 tons
Apply 20 tons
Apply 20 tons
Continue loading in 20 tons increments spaced at 2-hours (or more) until failure occurs as defined
above, provided, however that the Engineer-in-charge may discontinue the test at twice the design if
the contractor does not possess equipments or Kent ledge required for higher loads.
Observation of Settlements:
The methods and apparatus used for the observations and measurement of settlements shall be
proposed and supplied by the Contractor and shall be subject to the Engineer-in-charge's approval.
Settlements shall be measured with reference to a steel bolt set in the top of the pile for this purpose.
During daylight hours three reading shall be taken for each observation during night hours adequate
artificial lighting shall be provided and six readings shall be taken. The settlement values used in
plotting the curves specified below shall be the mean value of the readings taken for each observation.
In applying load increments for which minimum waiting periods of two hours (or more) are stipulated
in the loading and unloading procedures described above, settlement readings shall be made and
recorded immediately before and immediately after each load increment, as well as at two hourly
intervals after each load increment where applicable, and the information obtained shall be recorded
in the log book together with the times of observation and the load values. Where longer minimum
time intervals are specified settlement, readings shall be taken and recorded immediately before and
immediately after each change in the loading as well as 1, 2, 4, 8,16 and 24 hours after the last
change of loading.
At ultimate load settlement observations shall continue under full load for not less than 96 hours at
two-hourly intervals for the first twelve hours, four-hourly intervals for the next twelve hours and
eight-hourly intervals thereafter.
Page 77 of 194
Load Test Report

A load test report shall be submitted in triplicate and shall contain the following information:
(a) The location of the test pile with reference to previously established monuments or other permanent
features, drawn in a plan to a suitable scale.
(b) A bore-hole log showing reduce levels of the existing ground levels, of the top of the pile, of the tip
of the pile and of the ground water table, and showing also the thicknesses and reduced levels of various
soil strata encountered during boring as well as their visual classification.
(c) A time-load-settlement graph plotting the time in hours on the horizontal axis, the loads in tons and
the recorded settlements in thousands of afoot being plotted to a suitable scale on the vertical axis
respectively above and below the common time axis.
(d) A load-settlement graph with the load in tons plotted on the horizontal axis and the corresponding
settlements in thousand of a foot plotted onwards on the vertical axis, all to a suitable scale and annotated
with description of settlement variations with time at critical or otherwise important load values.
A report giving a general description of the load test and copies or the load test log is in tabular form with
observations of loads, settlements and time and remarks concerning any usual or network concurrences
during the entire operation.
Power of The Engineer-In-Charge

Should the Engineer-in-charge have any reason to doubt the rigorous accuracy and complete reliability
of the pile loading test, he may, at his sole discretion and without recourse, reject out of hand all the
results obtained on the test pile and order the Contractor to carry out new tests on a new tests pile, and
the Contractor shall do so his own expense without claiming any additional remuneration.
Materials
For detail specifications of cement, aggregates concrete and reinforcement refer to specifications for Civil
Works.
Payment
No separate payment will be made for the work covered under this section of the specifications, and all
cost in connection therewith shall be included in the item rate of the contract for the appropriate item to
which this work pertains.
2.4. WATER PROOFING POLYTHENE SHEET
2.4.1. DESCRIPTION
The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying and laying in place one layers of 0.18
mm thick polythene sheets where needed in accordance with the applicable plans, schedules and
these specifications.
Page 78 of 194
2.4.2. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT
The sheets shall be laid under C.C. covering the entire inside area. Before laying the sheet, the
surface shall be cleaned to give a surface free from damage, tear or other imperfections and shall
be laid such that there is a minimum of 225 mm (9”) overlap between adjacent strips.
Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter (sqm) of area covered by the sheet. No
allowance will be made for overlaps.
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be made on the
contract unit price per square meter (sqm) which payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing all materials, equipment and labour including storage handling and transport of material,
cleaning, preparing, cutting, laying, fixing as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
2.5. WATER PROOFING WITH FORMDEX PLUS CEMENTITIOUS CAPILLARY

WATERPROOFING
2.5.1. GENERAL
The work under this section includes the specification of cementitious capillary waterproofing for
foundation and basement walls below grade as indicated in drawing to provide immediate and
positive water proofing.
Formdex Plus is a surface applied material, which waterproof and protect concrete in-depth. These
materials consist of a mixture of Portland cement, specially treated and graded quartz sand and a
mixture of active chemicals.
When these materials are applied to the concrete surface, the additives penetrate the capillaries of
the concrete, mix with the free lime and moisture to form crystals and thereby block the capillaries.
2.5.2. SURFACE PREPARATION
2.5.2.1. Concrete must not contain any water-repellent additives.

2.5.2.2. Surface must be clean, free from oil and paint and have a wood float finish.
2.5.2.3. The structure must be examined for structural defects and any defects must be repaired.
2.5.2.4. All protrusions must be removed, honeycomb areas, cracks exceeding 0.3mm wide and any
other damaged areas shall be hacked out to the sound concrete to a minimum depth of 25mm
and treated with two coats of Formdex Plus and then re-plastered to original profile with
sand/cement mortar.
2.5.2.5. The surface of very smooth concrete must be roughened by grinding sand or grit blasting or
acid etching.
Page 79 of 194
2.5.2.6. Substrate must be thoroughly cleaned with water prior to Formdex treatment to ensure surface
in clean and concrete is saturated. Any surface water must be removed so that concrete surface
is damp only immediately prior to applying Formdex.
2.5.3. MIXING OF FORMDEX PLUS
2.5.3.1. Separate clean containers must be used for measuring by volume Formdex Plus materials and
CLEAN water.
2.5.3.2. Mixing ratio for Formdex Plus:-
Formdex Plus : 1 parts of clean water to 3 parts of powder.
2.5.3.3. Add water to powder and mix by mechanical mixer/hand mix until mix is completely lump free.
2.5.3.4. The “pot life” of mixed material is 15 minutes therefore only mix sufficient materials that can
be used within this time.
2.5.4. FORMDEX SLURRY APPLICATION
2.5.4.1. External Walls apply by brush or spray 2 coats of Formdex Plus at 0.75 kg/m2 per coat green
on green application.
2.5.4.2. Internal Concrete Walls apply by brush or spray 2 coats of Formdex Plus at 0.75 kg/m2 green
on green application.
2.5.4.3. Floors/Slabs apply by brush two coats of Formdex Plus at 0.75 kg/m2 onto top surface.
2.5.5. FORMDEX DRY SPRINKLING APPLICATION
2.5.5.1. Apply Formdex Plus at a coverage rate of 1.5 kg/m2 onto clean dry/damp lean concrete
immediately prior to pouring of concrete slab.
2.5.5.2. 5.2 Apply Formdex Plus at a coverage rate of 1.50 kg/m2 onto concrete immediately after it
has reached its initial set and then trowel in by hand or powered float.
2.5.6. FORMDEX APPLICATION TO JOINTS
2.5.6.1. Accessible Construction Joints apply by brush 2 coat of Formdex Plus at a coverage rate of
0.75 kg/m2 immediately prior to pouring of concrete
or
Apply by dry sprinkling Formdex Plus at a coverage rate of 1.5 kg/m2 immediately prior to
pouring of concrete.
2.5.6.2. Inaccessible Construction Joints apply by brush one coat of Formdex Plus at a coverage rate
of 1.5 kg/m2 prior to the erection of form work.
Page 80 of 194
2.5.6.3. Existing Construction Joints shall be “V” out to a depth and width of 25mm and then apply by
brush 1 coat of Formdex Plus at a coverage rate of 1.5 kg/m2 and then fill chase to original
profile with sand/cement mortar.
2.5.7. CURING AND PROTECTION FORMDEX TREATED SURFACES
2.5.7.1. Formdex treated surfaces whilst setting, shall be protected from rain and direct sunlight,
especially during the early curing period.
Protection against rain - Protect with a layer of plastic sheeting.
Protection against Sunlight - Protect by either covering with moist sand

or plastic sheeting, or by carefully post watering
constantly with fine water spray, for at least 5 days.
2.5.7.2. For enclosed areas, air circulation is necessary within the first 24 hours to ensure the
normalsetting of the Formdex applications.
2.5.7.3. Formdex treated surfaces shall not be exposed to aggressive chemical or acids until Formdex
materials have reached its full cure, which normally require 14 days.
2.5.8. REFERENCES
a. ASTM C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars.
b. ASTM C 321 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Chemical-Resistant
Mortars.
c. ASTM C 348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars.
d. ASTM C 596 - Standard Test Method for Drying Shrinkage of Mortar Containing
Portland Cement.
e. ASTM C 944 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Concrete or Mortar
Surfaces by the Rotating-Cutter Method.
f. COE CRD-C 48 - Method of Test for Water Permeability of Concrete; U.S. Army Corps
of Engineers.
g. NSF 61 - Drinking Water Systems - Health Effects; NSF International, Inc.
Measurement will be taken on site only for the accepted area in sqm. lapping will be treated as
a single areas and loss due to workmanship cutting, fixing, etc. will not be considered in the
measurement.
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be made on the
contract unit price per sqm which pavement shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all
materials, equipment and labour including storage, handling, transporting of materials, cleaning,
preparing and laying bed, cutting, fixing, making joints water tight and protect the fixed members
for any kind of damage from other activities.
Page 81 of 194
2.6. CONCRETE
2.6.1. DESCRIPTION
The item shall consist of manufacturing concrete as provided in these specifications and
constructing the forms, dimensions and design shown on the Plans. Fresh Concrete on plastic
concrete is a freshly mixed material which can be molded into any shape. The relative quantities
of cement, aggregates & water mixed together control the properties in the west state as well as in
the handed state. The contraction shall procure all materials and design the mixes to the
specification and carry out all laboratory and full scale trial mixes and associated testing for the
approval of the Engineer.
Generally, the structural design Engineers prescribes for any project (4 to 10 storied
Building) the concrete used by Contractor shall be of strength 4500 psi for column, 3000 psi
for pile and 3,500 psi for other structural members.
Concrete shall consist of a mixture of port land cement, fine aggregate, course aggregate and
water. The proportions in which the various ingredients shall be used in the concrete mix for
various work, shall be designed in accordance with the specified strength and suitable work ability.
Materials shall conform to the requirements specified below and in the relevant sections of Material
Specifications.
a. Cement shall be port land cement Type-I, ASTM C-150 only one brand, grade or kind of cement
shall be used in a given structure, except upon the written permission of the Engineer-in-Charge.
b. Fine Aggregate shall consist of well-graded clean natural sand free from injurious amount of
organic impurities and deleterious substances and shall have a Fineness Modules of not less
than 2.8.
c. Water for use in concrete shall be palatable and subjected to the approval by the Engineer-in-
Charge. It shall be clear, free from injurious quantities of oil, alkali, slats and organic substance,
any solid particles, etc.
d. Admixtures or cement containing additives shall be used only with approval or the Engineer-in-
Charge.
When it is desired to reduce the amount of water and still maintain a plastic workable mix
admixtures may be added to the concrete subject to approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Suitability
of an admixture should be established by trial mix and appropriate tests prior to its use.
Where water proofing properties are particularly required by the work, concrete shall be mixed with
“puddlo, Empermo” or similar admixture in approved quantity subject to the approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
2.6.3. COMPOSITION OF CONCRETE
2.6.3.1. Trial Mixes

The proportion, in which the various ingredients shall be used in the concrete mix for different
parts of the work, shall be designed in accordance with the specified strength as defined in the
drawings and schedules. Trial mixes with the materials to be used shall be prepared in a standard
approved (by KIB) laboratory at least 30 days before the commencement of concrete. No
Page 82 of 194
concrete shall be placed in the work until the relevant mix has been approved by the "Engineer".
The trial mixes will determine the amount of cement, water, fine and coarse aggregate-gate and
admixture (where necessary), required per one cubic metre of each class of concrete, and shall
be used to determine the weight and volume of each component required to produce one batch
of concrete from the mixers proposed for use by the contractor. The Table in clause 4.1.3.3
below is a guide only. The minimum specified strength must be obtained with proper mix design
& trial mixes. In this regard the Engineer shall have the right to increase the quantity of cement
or to adjust other materials as he finds suitable for the work. No extra claim, whatsoever, by the
contractor will be entertained. The Contractor shall have to obtain a written approval from
Engineer of the mix/proportion to be used for different type of specified strength. This approval
shall not relieve the Contractor from his contractual responsibility. As the work progresses, the
Engineer reserves the right to change the proportions from time to time, if conditions warrant
such changes, to produce concrete complying with specification requirements. No change in the
source or character of materials shall be made without due notice and approval of the Engineer.
No new materials shall be used until the Engineer has accepted such materials and has approved
new proportions based on tests by trial mixes.
For all projects, a trial mixing must be done for all other structural member except column
and piles to gain 3,500 psi strength. For column, a trail mix must be done to gain 4,500 psi
strength.
2.6.3.2. Average Strength of trial Mixes

The required average compressive strengths of trial mixes for concrete of the specified strengths
is in the following table:
Class of concrete Specified Strength Trial mix required average strength
N/mm² (Minimum) N/mm² (Minimum)
A 35 47
B 25 35
C 21 30
D 15 23
2.6.3.3. Standard Classes of Concrete

The class of concrete and properties applicable to the concrete in various parts of structures
shall be as specified in the following table.
Class of Maximum size Maximum water Minimum Maximum 28day cylinder

concrete of aggregate cement ratio by cement content slump(mm) strength
(mm) weight (kg/m³) (N/mm²)
A 20 0.40 400 66 35
B 25 0.50 360 75 25
C 25 0.52 350 75 21
D 25 0.70 250 75 15
The maximum cement content in any mix shall not exceed 510 kg/m³.
Page 83 of 194
2.6.3.4. Location of Concrete by Class

The various classes of concrete shall be placed in the locations specified below and elsewhere
as directed.
Type of mix to be used in structures

Class of Concrete Location
A Pre-stressed concrete members and structure
B Nil
C Reinforced concrete pre-cast piles, pile caps, pier columns, pier caps,
girders, cross girders, deck slab, side walk, curb, wheel guard, hand rails
and rail post
D Blinding concrete
2.6.3.5. Regulation of Water Content

The amount of water used in the concrete for volume batching shall be regulated to adjust for
any variation of the moisture content or grading of the aggregates. The batched volume of damp
fine aggregate shall be corrected to the equivalent volume of dry aggregate. The volume of
moisture in the aggregates shall be deducted from the free water to be added to the mix. To
expedite correction to fine aggregate a "bulking curve" showing the relation between moisture
content and increase over dry volume shall be prepared in advance by tests on the fine aggregate
used. The Engineer may direct the use of a slump less than that specified above whenever
concrete of such lesser slump can be consolidated into place by means of vibration specified
herein. Addition of water to overcome stiffening of the concrete before placing will not be
permitted. Concrete shall have uniform consistency from batch to batch. Aggregate shall not be
batched for concrete when free water is dripping from the aggregate. All costs shall be deemed
to be included in the rates tendered for the various item of concrete construction.
2.6.4. BATCHING
All concrete should be mixed in Concrete Batch Plant. The Contractor shall provide and maintain
suitable measuring equipment and devices of good order required to determine and control
accurately the relative amount of various materials entering the mix. All measurements shall be
by weight/volume and shall be accurate within a tolerance of 1% for each batch.
a. Cement: The cement shall be weighted. A bag of cement weighing (112 lbs.) 50 kg. net will be
considered as 0354 cum (1.25 cu.ft.)
b. Aggregate : Different types and sizes of aggregates shall be batched separately by weight/volume.
c. Water : The amount of mixing water shall be weighted, allowance being made for the quantity of
the free water contained in the aggregates, which shall be determined before the mixing begins and
further as the Engineer-in-Charge.
Sufficient acceptable materials shall be available at the batching site to ensure continuous
placement of concrete.
Moisture Content : The coarse and fine aggregates should preferably be in SSD condition (at
least close to SSD condition) at the time of mixing.
The moisture content of the fine and coarse aggregate shall be determined just before concrete
mixing is commenced. The amount of water to be added to each batch shall be adjusted
accordingly and as directed y the Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 84 of 194
The moisture content of the accepted aggregate shall remain constant to the extent that the
resultant successive batch of concrete do not vary in consistency by more than 6 mm (1/4 inch)
of a slump. If the moisture content in the aggregate varies by more than the above tolerance,
corrective measures shall be taken to bring the moisture to a constant and uniform quantity
before any more concrete is placed.
Coarse aggregate shall be saturated with water at least 12 hours before use to prevent absorption
of the mixing water.
2.6.5. MIXING
2.6.5.1. General
Concrete shall be mixed in a batch mixer of an approved type and appropriate capacity. No
mixer having a rated capacity of less than one bag batch shall be used nor shall a mixer be
charged if excess of its rated capacity. Each batch shall be thoroughly mixed for a period of not
less than two (2) minutes after all the materials including the water are in the drum and during
this period the drum shall be in the mixing position and revolve at uniform rate of not less than
14 nor more than 20 revolutions per minute.
Entire content shall be removed from the drum before the succeeding batch is introduced.
Concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Concrete shall not be used
which has developed initial set or which is not in place within thirty (30) minutes after the water
has been added. Re-tempering of partially hardened concrete by re-mixing with or without
additional materials or water, or by other means will not be permitted.
The inside of the mixing drum shall kept free from hardened concrete at all times. Mixers which
have been out of use for more than 30 minutes, shall be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh
concrete is mixed. The first batch of concrete would contain 10% more cement in addition to the
normal mix. Mixing drum shall be thoroughly cleaned before changing from one type of cement
to another. Cylinders may be taken from the first batch of concrete as well.
2.6.5.2. Mixing Time

Unless otherwise directed or approved, the mixing of each batch shall continue for not less than
the number of minutes stated in the following Table after all materials are in the mixer:
Table
Capacity of mixer (m³) Mixing time (minutes)
1 or less 1.50
2 2.00
3 2.50
The minimum mixing periods specified are conditional on the materials being fed into the mixer
in a manner which will facilitate efficient mixing and on operation of the mixer at its designed
speed.
2.6.5.3. Charging Sequence

The Engineer reserves the right to vary the mixing time or to limit the batch size when the charging
and mixing operations fail to produce a batch of concrete that conforms to the foregoing
requirements in respect of adequacy of mixing. The concrete of a given composition, as
discharged from the mixer, shall be uniform in composition and consistency within batches and
from batch to batch. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer shall contain a
sufficient excess of cement, sand and water to coat the inside of the drum without reducing the
Page 85 of 194
required mortar content of the mix. Water shall be added before, during and following the mixer-
charging operations. Excessive over-mixing, requiring addition of water to preserve the required
concrete consistency, will not be permitted. No material for a batch of concrete shall be placed
in the drum of the mixer until all of the previous batch has been discharged there from. The inside
of the drum shall be kept free from hardened concrete.
2.6.5.4. Mixer Performance

Any mixer that at any time does not meet the requirements of this Clause shall be repaired
promptly and effectively or shall be replaced.
2.6.5.5. Payment
Separate payment shall not be made for complying with the requirements of this Clause and all
costs shall be deemed to be included in the rates tendered in the priced Schedule for the various
items of concrete construction.
2.6.6. 6.6 CONSISTENCY OF CONCRETE
The consistency of concrete shall be determined following evaluation of the placement

conditions for each individual section of the work but in no case, the slum shall exceed 63 mm
(2.5 inches) mix proportion and consistency shall produce a dense, well compacted concrete
with a minimum tendency to aggregate under placing conditions, free from sand streaks,
honeycomb, air-pockets, exposed reinforcing steel and other forms of structural weakness or
unsatisfactory appearance.
2.6.7. TRANSPORT AND PLACING
Concrete shall be so transported by Mobile mixture truck from the Batching Plant mixer and
placed in the form that contamination, segregation or loss of the constitute materials does not
occur. Before placing the concrete within the form-work the space and the reinforcement shall
be thoroughly cleaned of all extraneous matter – Care shall be taken to fill every part of the
forms, to work the coarse aggregate back from the face so that sufficient mortar will be flushed
from the mass to form a smooth surface, and to force and concrete under and around reinforcing
bars without displacing them.
The concrete shall not be deposited in the forms in horizontal layers to a depth not exceeding
450 mm (18 inches).
The concrete shall not be dropped freely from a height exceeding 1.5 m nor shall it be deposited
in large quantities at any point. Dragging of concrete inside the forms or distribution by vibrators
or allowing it to flow by gravity to the ends of the forms will not be permitted.
Wile placing concrete in slabs the initial patches casted for measuring thickness should be at
least 1500 mm away from the support (column) faces. In slabs, concrete should be placed in
thickness 25 mm excess of what is required and compacted to the desired thickness with
rammers (Patta). In sections where it is extremely difficult to place concrete containing the
larger sizes of the coarse aggregate a modified mix, as approved by the engineer-in-charge may
be used to ensure against honeycomb and separation of the coarse aggregate from the mortar.
Concrete shall be deposited and compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of its discharge
from the mixer and shall not be subjected to any disturbance or vibration within 72 hours after
compaction.
Page 86 of 194
2.6.8. COMPACTION OF CONCRETE
The concrete after placing shall be thoroughly compacted by means of an appropriate method.
Care must be taken not to disturb deposited concrete once it has started setting in the structural
form.
Mechanical vibrators of the capacity as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be used in

conjunction with or without hand rammers, pokers of any other means as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
Vibrators must be operated by skilled workmen engaged/appointed by the contractor mainly for
this job. Always stand by vibrator should be kept for each group of vibrators.
The vibrator should be inserted at intervals not exceeding 60 cm until it is immersed to the full
depth of concrete. It should be slowly removed, care being taken to ensure the hole it leaves is
filled properly. Compaction will be considered to be completed shortly after bubbles cease to
form on top of the concrete and care should be taken to ensure that the concrete is not over
vibrated so as to cause segregation.
Surface vibrators of the type of Pan-vibrators, or vibrating screens shall be used for compacting
floors and other castings of shallow depth as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
In walls, when using immersion vibrators these should be lowered to the bottom of the wall
before concreting is started and pulled up as concreting proceeds. When using vibrators,
concrete can be placed from bottom to top of wall in one process, provided it is laid in regular
layers. Care should be taken to ensure that vibrators are not trapped under a great depth of
concrete.
Compaction must be vigorous and thorough . Care should be taken to compact concrete
properly into corners and under the reinforcement etc. Care should also be taken so that
segregation or bleeding does not take place wing to the use of vibrators.
In columns, deep beams and walls mild striking by mallets at the outer faces of the form works
should also be done simultaneously during use of vibrator for compactions.
2.6.9. CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
2.6.9.1. General
All concrete construction shall conform to the requirements of this Clause and the detailed
requirements of Clauses 2.6.2 to 2.6.7 inclusive. All structures shall be built in a workmanlike
manner to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Drawings or directed.
2.6.9.2. Accessories
The Contractor shall place and attach to each structure all timber, metal or other accessories
necessary for its completion, as shown on the Drawings or directed. The cost of such work, for
which specific items are not provided in the Schedule, shall be deemed to be included in the
rates tendered in the priced Schedule for the work to which they are appurtenant.
2.6.9.3. Changes to Dimensions

The dimensions of each structure shown on the Drawings will be subject to such changes as
may be found necessary by the Engineer to adapt the structures to the conditions disclosed by
the excavation or for any other practical reason.
Page 87 of 194
2.6.9.4. Changes in Colour

Abrupt changes in colour of external concrete surfaces exposed to public view will not be
permitted. The Contractor shall ensure, as far as possible, the surfaces shall be of uniform or
well graded colour using a consistent approved mix.
2.6.9.5. Application of Loads

Loads shall not be applied to concrete placed in the Permanent Works without prior approval.
2.6.9.6. Joints
(a) Construction Joints: Construction joints shall be approximately horizontal or vertical unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings or directed and shall be given the prescribed shape by the use
of forms, where required, or by other approved means that will ensure suitable jointing with
subsequent work. Unless shown on the Drawings key ways shall not be required at construction
joints. All intersections of construction joints with concrete surfaces which will be exposed to
view shall be made straight and level or plumb and leak proof by the use of 25mm by 18mm
timber or approved inserts in the corner of the form-work.
(b) Contraction Joints: Contraction Joints shall be located and constructed as shown on the
Drawings. The joints shall be made by forming the concrete on one side of the joint and allowing
it to set before concrete is placed on the other side of the joint. Unless otherwise shown or
specified, the surface of the concrete first placed at contraction joints shall be coated with a
colourless grease to break the bond before the concrete on the other side of the joint is placed.
2.6.9.7. Payment
The cost of construction and contraction joints shall be included in the rates tendered in the
priced Schedule for the concrete in which the joints are required.
2.6.10. SAMPLING OF PLASTIC CONCRETE
The Contractor in the presence of the Engineer shall sample concrete for testing from the
batching and mixing plant, at the time of pouring into the forms or elsewhere where concrete is
being handled or placed. Samples shall be obtained at uniform intervals throughout the
production or delivery of concrete for a given placement. The contractor shall supply sufficient
number of cylinder moulds and slump cones to enable the sampling required by this section. A
placement shall be considered as a continuous operation involving the placing of concrete as
follows for:
(a) In-situ concrete: In general, the frequency of sampling of a class of concrete in any
placement will be in accordance with the following table:
Frequency of Sampling Concrete

Up to 10 cubic metres 1 sample
Up to 20 cubic metres 2 samples
Up to 40 cubic metres 3 samples
For each additional 20 cubic meters or fraction, 1 extra sample shall be taken. In general, four
specimen cylinders, two for testing at 7 days and 2 for testing at 28 days, plus as many
specimens as required by the Engineer for other testing will be made from any sample. For pre-
cast units, a third specimen cylinder shall be taken from every sample for testing prior to removal
of the forms. The Contractor shall provide the required quantity of concrete for sampling and
testing and shall include the cost of this concrete and any concrete required separately by the
Page 88 of 194
Engineer for any other necessary tests, in the rates tendered in the priced Schedule for the various
items of concrete construction. The Contractor has the right to be present at any sampling or
testing conducted by the Engineer but such right shall not operate to restrict in any way the right
of the Engineer to take samples or make tests at any time. The number and frequency of the
tests on plastic concrete will be in accordance with the above table but in general shall not be
less than four tests for each eight hours of concrete production. More frequent testing of plastic
concrete shall be directed under certain circumstances, such as but not limited to times when
the fine aggregate moisture content is fluctuating. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any
additional compensation due to any additional sampling or testing of plastic concrete at any
location so directed by the Engineer.
2.6.11. CONTROL TESTS FOR CONCRETE
Entire operation shall be with due precaution so that the structural integrity is no way affected
and as per approval of Engineer. The contractor will be responsible for any negligence. If
approved by the Engineer, on each specific occasion, at the Contractors expense, hardened
concrete liable to rejection shall be tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM
C42. Unless otherwise directed, cores shall be 150mm in diameter. At least 3 specimen shall be
cored and tested from the points as directed by the Engineer. If the average compressive strength
of the core specimen so obtained is equal to or greater than 85% of the specified 28 day cylinder
strength for that section of the work, the concrete represented by the core specimen shall be
considered to be structurally satisfactory. If the concrete is considered to be structurally
satisfactory the holes left by the removal of the test cores shall be repaired as specified in these
documents or as directed by the Engineer. Unless otherwise directed concrete which fails to
meet the requirements of this Clause shall be removed and replaced in an approved manner
without any extra cost to the department
a. Slump :The determination shall be made at the commencement of concreting on the occasion
of each change in mix proportions, and thereafter as desired by the Engineer-in-Charge. The
testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C-143, current issue.
b. Compressive Strength : Test cylinders 150 mm (6 inches) in diameter and 300 mm (12
inches) high shall be made at the site of the work in sets of six (6).
Casting and curing the cylinders shall be in accordance with ASTM C-31, current issue. Testing
of cylinders shall be done in accordance with ASTM C-39, current issue, 3 cylinder at 7 days
and 3 at 28 days.
If the Engineer-in-Charge allows cubes to be tested instead of cylinders, the cube strength shall
be at least 17.5 percent higher than the cylinder strength specified.
2.6.12. REJECTION OF PLASTIC CONCRETE
Plastic concrete shall be liable to rejection if:
a) The slump at the time of placing, measured to the nearest 5mm, is not within +/- 10mm of
the slump specified or the slump directed.
b) the water/cement ratio is not as specified.
Plastic concrete which has been rejected shall be removed from the works with the least possible
delay.
Page 89 of 194
2.6.13. CURING AND PROTECTION
Concrete shall be protected against harmful effects of weather for a period of not less than
twenty eight (28) days immediately following the placing.
All exposed surface shall be covered with two layers of wet burlap which have been spot stitched
or wet jute felt soon after placing of concrete as it can be done without manning the surface and
kept thoroughly wet by continuous sprinkling of water for a period of not less than twenty eight
(28) days after the concrete has taken its set.
In lieu of continuous sprinkling, plastic sheeting or plastic-coated burlap may be used to prevent
moisture loss. The concrete shall be pre-moistured and the plastic sheeting shall be held
securely in place so that positive moisture seal is provided to retain the curing moisture during
the curing period. The material should be of sufficient strength to prevent dislodging or tearing
by weather elements or foot traffic. Torn or perforated sheeting shall be without delay repaired
or replaced with acceptable material.
Proper curing shall have preference and, if necessary, workmen and materials shall be
temporarily kept off the new concrete until the curing is completed.
2.6.14. LOADING
No load shall be applied or other work conducted that will damage new concrete or interfere with
its curing. Great care shall be exercised to prevent the bond between new concrete and the
embedded portion of reinforcing steel projecting from the new concrete from being damaged by
bending or otherwise disturbing the steel.
2.6.15. TOLERANCE FOR CONCRETE SURFACES
Except as detailed elsewhere in this specification, the tolerance of concrete surfaces shall be in
accordance with the following:
Table of Tolerance
Structural Concrete
Lengths Up to 3 m + 6 mm
3 m up to 6 m + 10 mm
6 m upwards + 13 mm
Cross section (each direction) Up to 500 mm + 6 mm

500 mm to 1m + 10 mm
1m upwards + 13 mm
Straightness or bow (deviation-

from intended line) Up to 3 mm + 6 mm
3 mm to 1m + 10 mm
6 m upwards + 13 mm
Level of Concrete + 6 mm
Page 90 of 194
2.6.16. CONCRETING IN HIGH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
The temperature of concrete shall not exceed 32° C at the time in placing and the maximum
concrete temperature after placing shall not exceed 65°C, not shall the temperature gradient
exceed 30°C. In controlling the temperature steps may be taken to
a ) Shade aggregate, cement silos/ Drums / bins, water tank and concrete plant.
b ) Isolated mixture truck.
c ) Use chillers / Ice to producing as economically as possible concrete of certain minimum
properties, notably consistence, strength and durability .
2.7. FORM WORK
2.7.1. SCOPE OF WORK
The work to be performed under this Section includes the furnishing and installing and removing
of forms for all cast-in-places concrete work as shown and noted on the drawings and as
specified herein.
2.7.2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS
Pertinent provisions of the following listed current reference standard shall apply to the work of
this section, except as they may be modified herein, and are hereby made a part of this
specification to the extent required. At least one copy of current ACT 347 shall be kept available
at the project’s central office.
American Concrete Institute (ACI) current issue of-
ACI 347 Recommended practice for Concrete Formwork
2.7.3. MATERIALS
2.7.3.1. Earth Forms

Earth forms may be used for footings and foundations only where the soil is firm and stable and
the concrete will not be exposed. Where earth forms are to be used, excavation shall be cut
neatly and accurately to size for placing of concrete directly against the excavation.
2.7.3.2. Form Surface Materials-General

Form surface materials, regardless of type, shall permit tight construction to prevent seepage
of concrete mortar or paste through joints, and shall be of uniform thickness to the extent that
tolerances hereinafter specified will not be exceeded. Form surface materials shall be of sufficient
thickness to withstand pressure of freshly placed concrete and of concrete vibrators without bow
or deflection.
2.7.3.3. Form surface Materials for ‘As Cast/ Fair Face’ Concrete Surfaces
Form surface materials for exposed As Cast/ faire faced concrete surfaces shall be mainly
Marine ,(Linonix Film) plywood type materials, acceptable to the Engineer, which will provide
continuous, level, straight, smooth exposed surfaces free from surface imperfections such as
dent, budges, misalignments, offsets etc. Angle frame shall be used in designing the such form
work. The thickness of Marine Plywood shall be 20 mm; and the same can be used both faces
maxi four times.
Page 91 of 194
Metal panels, if used, where indicated in the drawing shall be composed of flat smooth & non-
staining steel sheet or plate of sufficiently, thickness minimum 14 BWG grinding finished, to
prevent deflection from pressure of concrete. Steel forms shall be galvanised or coated to
preclude imparting rust or other stains to concrete. The contractor will be required to submit a
complete design and shop drawing of the formwork the intends to use in each stage of his work.
The design will include the method of supporting the formwork and shall indicate size, length etc.
of form ties if used. The Engineer will review and approve such designs prior to the erection of
any formwork. The designs as approved will be basis upon which the contractor will proceed
with his formwork. Design of formwork is the contractor will proceed with his formwork. Design
of formwork is the Contractor’s responsibility within the guidelines specified herein.
2.7.3.4. Form Surface Materials for Plastered Finish Concrete

Form surface materials for concrete surfaces, which will later be plastered in the finished
structure, shall be plywood, metal, boards, or other acceptable material. Boards, if used, shall
be nominal one-one fourth (1 ¼”) inch minimum thick material, sound and tight commercial
construction lumber, preferably ship-lapped or tongue-and-grooved and dressed. Minimum
acceptable: boards which are dressed on at least on side and both edges for tight fit. Plywood
or metal, if used, shall conform to the requirements specified above for exposed fair concrete.
2.7.3.5. Form Ties

Form ties shall be prefabricated rod, flat band, or wire type, or threaded internal disconnecting
type, of sufficient tensile capacity to resist all imposed loads of freshly placed concrete and
having external holding devices of adequate bearing area. Ties shall permit tightening and
spreading of forms and shall leave no metal closer than one inch from surface. Ties shall fit tight
to prevent mortar leakage at holes in forms. Removable ties shall be coated with non-staining
bond breaker. All ties shall be protected from rusting at all times. No wire ties or wood spreaders
will be permitted. Cutting ties back from concrete face will not be permitted. Ties for exposed
Architectural Concrete shall be plastic cone snap ties.
2.7.3.6. Form Coating

Non-grain raising and non-staining Concrete release type that will not leave residual matter on
surface of concrete or adversely affect proper bonding of subsequent application of paint or other
material applied to concrete surface. Coatings containing mineral oils or other non-drying
ingredients will not be permitted.
2.7.4. DESIGN OF FORMWORK
The Contractor will be required to submit a complete design and shop drawing of the formwork
he intends to use in each stage of his work. The design will include the method of supporting the
formwork and shall indicate size, length etc. of form ties if used. The Engineer will review and
approve such designs prior to the erection of any formwork. The designs as approved will be the
basis upon which the contractor will proceed with his formwork. Design o formwork is the
Contractor’s responsibility within the guidelines specified herein.
Design formwork so that it will safely support vertical and lateral loads, which might be applied,
until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Carry vertical and lateral loads to
ground by formwork system and in-place construction, which has attained adequate strength for
that purpose. Construct formwork so that concrete members and structures are of correct sizes,
shape, alignment, elevation and positions.
Page 92 of 194
Design Forms and False work to include assumed values of live load, dead load, weight of moving
equipment operated on formwork, concrete mix, height of concrete drop, vibrator frequency,
ambient temperature, foundation pressures, stresses, lateral stability, and other factors pertinent
to safety of structure during construction.
Provide shores and struts with positive means of adjustment capable of taking up formwork
settlement during concrete placing operations, using wedges or jacks or a combination thereof.
Provide trussed supports when adequate foundations for shores and struts cannot be secured.
Support form facing materials by structural members spaced sufficiently close to prevent
deflection. Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment,
free from irregularities and within allowable tolerance. Provide camber in formwork as required
for anticipated deflections due to weight and pressure of fresh concrete and construction loads
for long span members without intermediate supports.
Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damage to cast-in-place

concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
2.7.5. REMOVAL OF FORMS
All form-work shall be removed without damage to the concrete and in accordance with a
programme agreed upon by the Engineer-in-Charge. Under usual conditions the following
minimum periods between concreting and the removal of formwork shall be observed:
Vertical
 - sides : 02 days
Soffit
 - : 21 days for Slab & 28 days for Beam
Forms on handrails, ornamental work and vertical surfaces that are to receive a rubbed surface
finish shall be removed as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Concrete exposed by the removal of formwork shall be left untouched pending inspection by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
2.7.6. SURFACE FINISH AND REMEDIAL
Concrete surface shall remain as cast. No plasterwork will be performed on the concrete surface.
The formwork shall be lined with a material approved by the Engineer-in-Charge to provide a
smooth finish of uniform texture and appearance. This material shall leave no stain on the
concrete and shall be so joined and fixed to its backing that it imparts no blemishes. It shall be
of the same type and obtained from only one source throughout any one structure. The
contractor shall repair any imperfections in the resulting finish as required by the Engineer-in-
Charge. Internal ties and embedded metal parts will be allowed only with the Engineer’s specific
approval.
2.7.7. TREATMENT OF SURFACES
Unless otherwise provided on the plans, all reasonably true and even surfaces, which are of a
uniform color and texture, and free from stone pockets, honeycomb, formwork marks,
depressions or projections, shall be considered as acceptable surfaces.
Page 93 of 194
On all exposed surfaces, all fins and irregular projections shall be removed with silicon carbide
stone or power grinder, care being taken to avoid contrasting surface textures. Sufficient white
cement shall be substituted for the regular cement in the filling of holes and other corrective work
to produce finished patches of the same color of the surrounding concrete.
Any remedial treatment to surfaces shall be agreed with the Engineer-in-Charge following
inspection immediately after removing the formwork and shall be carried out without delay.
Any concrete, the surface of which has been treated before being inspected by the Engineer-in-
Charge shall be liable to rejection.
No extra payment will be made for any type of surface finish, the cost being considered as
included in the price bid for concrete.
2.7.8. GROUT CLEANING
Where grout cleaning is called for on the plans or required by the Engineer-in-Charge because
of unsatisfactory appearance, the surface, after wetting, shall be uniformly covered with a grout
consisting of one part cement to 1.5 parts fine sand, and white cement shall be used for all or
part of the cement in the grout, to give the color required to match the concrete. The grout shall
be uniformly applied with brushes or a spray gun, and all air bubbles and holes shall be
completely filled. Immediately after the application of the grout, the surface shall be vigorously
scoured with a cork or other suitable float. While the grout is still plastic the surface shall be
finished with a sponge rubber or other suitable float removing all excess grout. This finishing
shall be done at the time when grout will not be pulled from the holes or depressions. After being
allowed to thoroughly dry, the surface shall be vigorously rubbed with a dry burlap to completely
remove any dried grout. There shall be no visible film of grout remaining on the surface after
this rubbing and the entire cleaning operation of any area must be complete on the day it is
started. If any dark spots or streaks remains after this operation, they shall be removed with a
fine-grained silicon carbide stone, but the rubbing shall not be sufficient to change the texture of
the surface. Unless authority specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge, grout
cleaning should be delayed until the final cleanup of the project.
2.7.9. RUBBED FINISH
Forms shall be removed, if possible, within two days time. Corrections shall be made as outlined
above. Rubbing of concrete shall be started as soon as the conditions will permit. Immediately
before starting this work the concrete shall be kept thoroughly saturated with water for a
minimum period of two hours. Sufficient time shall have elapsed before wetting down to allow
the mortar used in pointing insert holes and defects to be thoroughly set. Surfaces to be finished
shall be rubbed with a medium coarse silicon carbide stone until all form marks, projections and
irregularities have been removed, all voids filled and a uniform surface has been attained.
The paste produced by rubbing shall be left in place at this time. No additional material other
than water shall be applied to the surface. After all concrete above the surface being finished
has been placed, the final finish shall be obtained by rubbing with a fine silicon carbide stone
and water. This rubbing shall be continued until the entire surface is a smooth texture and
uniform in color. Any surface, which has been given a rubbed finish, shall be protected from
subsequent construction operations.
Page 94 of 194
Any surfaces not protected, shall be cleaned and again rubbed if necessary, to secure a uniform
and satisfactory surface.
After completion of initial rubbing, curing shall be continued.
This item shall be measured by the cubic meter (cum) complete in place for the several classes
of concrete that they may be involved. Measurement shall be to the near lines of the structure
shown on the plans or as ordered in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge. Cost of form-work shall
also be included with the rate of Concrete.
This amount of completed and accepted work, measured as provided above, shall be paid for at
the contract unit price per cubic meter (cum) for the several classes of concrete, which prices
shall be full compensation for furnishing, preparing, transporting, delivering, mixing and placing
all materials, including and admixtures, curing compound and joint filler, curing and finishing of
concrete, construction and removal of form-work and scaffolding where required and for all
labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item, except reinforcing steel
unless otherwise noted in the Bid Schedule.
2.8. PVC WATER STOPPER
2.8.1. GENERAL
This item will be done by approved type of PVC water stopper having min. thickness 6 mm and
width of 300 mm approved type for horizontal and vertical construction joint, length to be
provided on side as per drawing or as per instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
2.8.2. WORKMANSHIP
The PVC water stopper sheet will be fixed vertically in the vertical construction joints and
horizontally in horizontal construction joints in such a way the half of its width will be embedded
in the 1st stage on the casting at construction joints. The fixing should be such that its position
and alignment will not be changed due to construction, the PVC water stopper surface along with
the old concrete surface should be cleaned properly; care should be taken, so that PVC should
not be de-bonded with the old concrete any way. The strip should be continuous close circuit.
Any joint to the PVC water stopper should be watertight and should be done as per
manufacturers’ instructions. An overlap of 300 mm inch should be maintained at the joints.
Measurement for payment shall be made in linear meter (Rm) for the accepted part after
completion of the 2nd stage of concreting. No allowance will be made for lapping or curing for
workshop.
Page 95 of 194
2.8.4. MODE OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per meter of completed & accepted work
measured as above which price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials,
labour, tools, equipment in mixing, placing and curing of concrete etc. to complete the work
according to the application plans.
2.9. REINFORCEMENT
2.9.1. GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish and install all steel reinforcing bars hereinafter referred to as
reinforcement, required for execution of the works as specified herein, or as shown on the
Drawings or directed.
2.9.2. MATERIAL
(a) High yield deformed bar's shall be used with minimum yield strength of 413 N/mm²
(b) All deformed bars must confirm ASTM-A615-82-Grade 60. Tor-steel may also be used with
prior approval of the Engineer.
(c) Mild Steel Reinforcement shall have a minimum yield strength of 230 N/mm2
(d) At least 15 days before using any reinforcement in the Works, the Contractor shall submit,
for approval, representative samples of the proposed reinforcement to the Engineer.
(e) The Engineer may test, from time to time throughout the execution of the Works, further
samples of the reinforcement to check compliance with the Specification.
(f) The Contractor shall not change his source of supply of reinforcement without prior written
approval by the Engineer.
(g) Steel-reinforcing bars shall be placed in concrete where shown on the Drawings or directed.
2.9.3. BENDING OF REINFORCEMENT
All reinforcement bars shall be bent cold to pertinent dimension using bending appliances and
method approved by the Engineer. All bars of slab and beam shall invariably have standard
hooks at the end. All standard hooks shall meet the following requirements; unless otherwise
specified in the drawings:
a. A 180 degree turn plus an extension of at least four bar diameters but not less than 75 mm at
the free end of the bar.
b. A 90 degree turn plus an extension of at least 12 bar diameters at the free end of the bar.
c. For stirrup and the anchorage only :
i. For No.5 bars and smaller, 90 degree bend plus an extension of at least six bar
diameters or 75 mm inch whichever is greater at free end of bar.
ii. For No.6.7 and 8 bars, a 90 degree bend plus an extension of 12 bar diameters or
150 mm whichever is greater at free end.
iii. For No.8 bars and smaller, a 135 degree bend plus an extension of six bar
diameters at free end.
iv. The radius of bend measured on the inside of the bar for standard hooks shall not
be less than the values given below :
Page 96 of 194
Bar Dia. Minimum radius

10 mm, 12 mm, 2.5 bar dia
16 mm, 20 mm 3 bar dia
25 mm &
32 mm 4 bar dia
Bend for stirrups and ties shall have radii on the inside of the bar not less than one bar diameter.
2.9.4. PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT
a. All reinforcing bars or wires shall be supported and wired together to prevent displacement
by construction loads or the placing of concrete. On ground and where necessary supporting
concrete or mortar blocks may be used. Over form-work, concrete, metal, plastic or other
approved bar chairs and spaces shall be used. Where the concrete surface will be exposed
to the weather in the furnished structure or where rust would impair architectural finishes the
portions of all accessories in contact with the form-work shall be galvanized or shall be made
of plastic.
Binding wire used shall be black M.S. wire 24 SWG for binding M.S. rods of 6 mm dia and
above and 26 SWG for binding No.3 M.S. wire. If concrete cylinder block are used for proper
spacing of vertical bars in column, the height shall be 2.54 cm and radius shall be equal to
the distance of the centre line of the bar from column face.
b. The concrete cover blocks or spaces blocks shall be made concrete having 1 part cement, 1
part sand, 2 part coarse aggregate. The coarse aggregate would be 12 mm downgraded. The
blocks would be cast in mould and continuously cured for 21 days before use. Vertical bars
in columns shall be offset at least one bar diameter at lapped splices. To ensure proper
placement, templates shall be furnished for all columns dowels.
c. All splices not shown on the bar diagram shall require prior approval of the
consultant/Engineer-in-Charge
d. Unless permitted, reinforcement shall not be bent after being partially embedded in hardened
concrete. For hooks, bends, cleaning and spacing of reinforcement bars ACI Code shall be
followed.
The reinforcement work shall be inspected and approved by the Consultant/Engineer-in-Charge
before it is covered in concrete work.
2.9.5. SPACING OF REINFORCEMENT
Contractor will submit bar schedule and diagrams and get it approved from the consultant. No
splices/welding shall be made in the reinforcement where described in the bar schedule.
Splices/welding at points of maximum tensile/compressive stress shall have to be avoided. The
splice shall transfer the entire computed stress from bar to bar without exceeding three fourths
of the permissible bond values for the concrete. The length of lap shall be as mentioned in the
drawings.
Where longitudinal bars are offset at a splice the slope of the inclined portion of the bar with the
axis of the column shall not exceed 1 in 6 and the portions of the bar above and below the offset
shall be parallel to the axis of the column. Adequate horizontal support at the offset shall be
secured by additional stirrups, ties etc. Offset bars shall be bent before they are placed in the
forms.
Page 97 of 194
2.9.6. SUPPORT OF REINFORCEMENT
Pre-cast mortar blocks or metal supports of adequate strength, of proper depth and in sufficient
number shall be used for supporting the bars in position.
Mortar blocks shall be as small as possible consistent with their purpose, of a shape acceptable
to the Engineer and designed so that they will not overturn when concrete is placed. They shall
be made of concrete with 10 mm maximum aggregate size from same materials and of the
same max. proportions as that of the concrete in which are to be used. They shall be case and
properly cured for at least seven days before use and shall have wire or other device embedded
in the block for the purpose of attaching them securely to the reinforcement. For supporting of
Raft top reinforcement, much strong supporting device made of steel angle will be preferable.
2.9.7. PROTECTIVE COATING
All exposed reinforcing steel at construction joints shall be protected with brush coat of neat
cement, mixed to a consistency of thick paint, within on week after the placing of the initial
concrete, unless it is definitely known that the street will be embedded within 30 days. This
coating shall entirely removed, by light tapping with a hammer or other tool, not more than one
week previous to the placing of the final pour.
2.9.8. STORAGE AND CARE
All reinforcing steel when received on the site, prior to its use shall be stacked off the ground and
shall be kept free from dirt, oil, grease or avoidable rust, it shall be clean and free from loose rust
and loose mill scale at the time of fixing in position and subsequent concreting.
2.9.9. TOLERANCES FOR REINFORCING STEEL:
i) Length of splice -25mm

ii) Variation of protective cover  5mm
iii) Variation in indicated position of
reinforcement: One bar diameter
Starter bars 0.25 times the indicated spacing
Slabs and walls  5mm
Beams and columns
iv) Dimension of bent bars:
Stirrups and ties  5mm
Other bars  10mm
Provided the number of bars required by the specified spacing is not varied and provided the
specified minimum cover to reinforcement is maintained.
2.9.10. INSPECTION
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representative when the steel has
been placed in position ready for concrete and no concrete shall be placed until the Engineer-
in-Charge inspected the steel and given his approval in writing.
Where unit price bids are called for in the Bid Schedule, reinforcement actually in place as shown
on the drawings, bar schedule / bar diagram or as ordered in writing by the Engineer shall be
Page 98 of 194
considered for payment. No separate payment shall be allowed for chair, tap, splice, separator
etc. The cost of these is to be included in the unit rate.
The amount of completed and accepted materials, measured as provided above, shall be paid
for at the contract unit price per quintal for “Reinforcing Steel”, which prices shall be full
compensation for furnishing, fabricating, transporting, delivering, erecting and placing all
materials, and for all labour equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
2.10. RE-BAR WELDING
2.10.1. DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of welding to reinforcement of diameter more than 25mm, and under
strict instruction of Engineer-in-Charge, and is applicable only where necessary
a. Electrodes : All welding electrodes shall conform to American Welding Society (AWS) standards
and the electrodes shall be rods of size and classification number as recommended by their
manufacturers.
b. Quality : Welding of reinforcing bars shall be performed by skilled and experienced welders and
the connections shall be made in accordance with AWS standards.
c. Length and Thickness of Weld : All weld should be fillet welding having minimum throat thickness
10 mm, the weld should be on both faces of lap joints (minimum lap length 450 mm) the end of
all edges should be also welded at a slope 45 degree as per drawing.
The welding shall be measured on number basis. No weld will be paid for bar size smaller than
32 mm dia. and shorter than 8 metre length.
payment for welding shall be made at the contract unit price per number of specified joint. The
rate should included all labour, materials, equipment fuel and incidentals necessary to complete
the work.
2.11. STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
2.11.1. GENERAL
This section of the Specification applies to all relevant items of work of the Contract and shall be
read in conjunction with other sections of the Specification. It covers general requirements for
all steelworks to be supplied under this Contract including provision of all plant, labour,
equipment and materials required for the supply, fabrication, and erection of all metalwork and
steelwork items.
Page 99 of 194
2.11.2. SCOPE OF WORK
The work shall consist of the supply, fabrication, protective treatment, delivery and erection of
all steelwork strictly in accordance with the Drawings and Specification.
BS 449 Structural Steel Sections.

BS 639 Structural Steel Design.
BS 729 Manual Metal Arc Welding Carbon and Carbon Management Steel.
BS 2600 Welded Joints-Radiography.
BS 2493 Electrodes, low alloy steel, for manual arc welding.
BS 2994 Cold Rolled Sections.
BS 3692 Specification for ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts.
BS 3923 Ultrasonic testing of welds.
BS 4190 Specification for ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts.
BS 4848 Hot Rolled Sections.
BS 5135 Specification for Arc Welding.
BS 5950 Structural Steel in Buildings.
BS 7079 Preparation for Coating.
2.11.3. SHOP DRAWING AND DIMENSIONS
Shop drawings shall be submitted for all steelwork in accordance with the Specification.
Dimensions used in fabrication of steelwork items shall, wherever possible, be first obtained or
verified directly from the site. All references in this Specification to details being shown “on the
drawings” shall be interpreted as meaning the Contractor’s Shop Drawings.
2.11.4. MATERIALS
2.11.4.1. Mill Test Certificates

If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall obtain from the steel supplier test certificates
relating to tests performed by the manufacturer for the purpose of establishing compliance with
the appropriate material specification. The need for any additional tests for certification shall be
subject to agreement between the Engineer and the Contractor.
2.11.4.2. Material Grades

Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, materials shall be of the following grades:
Plates, sections, piling and bars Grade 250
Rectangular hollow sections Grade 300
Circular hollow sections Grade 210
Cold-formed sections Grade 450
2.11.4.3. Substitutions
Substitutions of structural sections can be made with the approval of the Engineer. Where
substations are approval payment will be made only for the members shown on the Drawings.
2.11.4.4. Condition
All materials to be used in the work shall be new and in good condition, free excessive rust and
pitting. Material that is split, excessively deformed or otherwise permanently damaged shall not
be used.
Page 100 of 194

2.11.4.5. Cold-Formed Sections

Cold-formed sections for purlin and girt, together with their associated bridging, struts and other
accessories shall be produced from continuously galvanized high strength steel strip. Minimum
zinc coating to be 200 g/m2.. Tie rods and fixing bolts shall be hot-dip galvanized in according
with BS 729.
2.11.5. SHOP DRAWINGS
2.11.5.1. Preparation
The Contractor shall prepare shop drawings in such detail as necessary for complete fabrication,
assembly and erection of the structural steelwork for the approval by the Engineer. Site
dimensions shall be taken where necessary to ensure all steelwork is accurately located.
In preparation shop drawings, the structural steelwork drawings shall be read in conjunction with
other relevant construction drawings. Provision shall be made for inclusion in the shop drawings
of dimensions, fixings and details shown other construction drawings.
Shop drawing shall be prepared in a manner to ensure correct fir-up and matching of steelwork
to all other work.
2.11.5.2. Submission and Approval

Subject to any other requirements of the Conditions of Contract the following procedure shall be
observed. Three copies of all shop drawing shall be submitted, free of charge, to the Engineer
for approval.
Approval by the Engineer will certainly the correct interpretation of design requirements but will
not include checking of any dimensions or holes and fixing to suit other trades. The Contractor
shall receive two signed approved copies of each shop drawing before commencing fabrication.
Drawings not approved shall be corrected, re-submitted and approved before the
commencement of fabrication.
2.11.6. FABRICATION
2.11.6.1. General
All fabrication shall be carried out to recognized standards of good practice and shall comply
with the requirements of BS 5950, except as otherwise specified.
The finished appearance of steelwork shall be appropriate to the type of structure for which it is
to be fabricated. Particular high class finishes, such as fairing or corners and edges, and grinding
of welds flush and smooth, shall be as stated on the Drawings.
2.11.6.2. Tolerances
On completion of fabrication, tolerances shall in accordance with BS 5950 unless otherwise
specified or shown on the Drawings.
2.11.6.3. Straightening and Bending

Before marking off, bent or otherwise distorted material shall be straightened and made true.
The Methods used to correct bent or distorted material or members and to camber, curve, bend
or set members and plates to specified shape shall not be injuries to the properties of the
material. Whenever possible, straightening and bending shall be done by mechanical means at
ambient temperature.
Page 101 of 194

Straightening and bending of steel of higher strength than Grade 250 by the application of heat
shall not be permitted unless the procedure proposed by the Contractor is expressly approved
by the Engineer.
2.11.6.4. Cutting
The cut edge of members and of all gusset plates, cleats and other connection fitments shall
be free of gouges, burrs and other defects that would adversely affect the serviceability of the
steelwork or detract from the finished appearance. All burrs, fins and raggedness left by sawing,
punching, shearing, cropping of flame cutting shall be removed before assembly and welding of
parts.
Cold sawing shall be used when it is required to cut a section accurately to length and level.
Re-entrant corners shall be shaped notch-free to a radius of at least 11 mm unless otherwise

shown on the Drawings.
2.11.6.5. Holes for Bolts

Holes for bolts shall generally not be more than 2 mm larger in diameter than the bolt. Holes for
anchor bolts shall not be more than 6 mm larger in diameter the anchor bolt, unless otherwise
shown on the Drawing. Oversize and slotted holes for high strength bolts shall be permitted in
accordance with BS 3692. Slotted holes for mild steel bolts shall be of dimensions shown on
the Drawings.
The minimum pitch, minimum edge distances, maximum pitch and maximum edge distance
shall conform with the requirements of BS 5490.
The surface around holes shall be smooth and free of burrs, fins and other defects that may
prevent solid seating of contact surfaces.
Punching of holes 3 mm undersize and then reaming shall be permitted in material of any
thickness. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, punching of holes full size shall not be
permitted in material thicker than 13 mm. The region around holes punched full size shall be flat
before assembly. Dressing around such holes by approved means shall be permitted.
2.11.6.6. Splices and Joints

Where available stock lengths of steel are shorter than the required length of member, splicing
by complete penetration full section butt welds shall be permitted, unless noted otherwise on the
Drawings.
Welded splices in compound members shall be staggered, and the component plates and section
spliced before compounding.
Critical field splices and joints shall be mated in the shop on completion of fabrication to ensure
satisfactory fir when erected.
Should the Contractor wish to make field splices and joints, whether bolted or welded, in
addition to those shown on the Drawings, or in different locations, such connections shall be
to the approval of the Engineer in respect to design, procedure and workmanship.
Page 102 of 194

2.11.7. WELDING
2.11.7.1. General
All welding shall be carried out by electric metal-arc processes in accordance with BS 5135
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Welding plant and equipment shall be of a standard acceptable to the Engineer and shall be
operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
2.11.7.2. Consumables
Electrodes and other welding consumables shall be stored and used as recommended by the
manufacturer. Covered electrodes for manual arc welding and fluxes for automatic and
semiautomatic welding that have wet or damped shall not be used whether they have been
redried or not.
Welding consumables shall be matched with the steel type for the particular application, and
shall be in accordance with BS 2493.
When welding heavy sections and in other special applications and conditions, low hydrogen
electrodes may be at the option of Contractor subject to the condition of BS 5135. Low hydrogen
electrodes shall in any case be employed if so directed by the Engineer.
2.11.7.3. Intermittent Welding

Intermittent welding shall only be permitted where shown on the Drawings. Seal welding and
weather runs shall be as noted on the Drawings. All items to be galvanized shall be seal welded.
2.11.7.4. Welding Personnel

All welding shall be carried out under the supervision of a person employed by the Contractor
who holds a current welding supervisors certificate in structural welding, or other qualifications,
experience or certification acceptable to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide evidence acceptable to Engineer that welders are qualified for the
procedures they will be carrying out. The Engineer may elect to observe qualification and
procedure tests and when required, such tests shall be conducted at no extra cost to the
Employer.
2.11.7.5. Workmanship
The requirements of the Drawings in respect to location, category, type, leg length or throat
thickness and length of welds shall be adhered to, unless variations are expressly approved by
the Engineer.
All welding procedures shall have the approval of the Engineer and such procedures tests as
they may require in accordance with BS 5135 shall be carried out prior to their employment in
the Work, at no extra cost to the Employer.
Preparation of edges to be welded shall be carried out by mechanical means or machine flame
cutting. Manual flame cutting shall only be used with the approval of the Engineer and provided
that the cut surfaces are ground to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.11.7.6. Weld Quality

The quality of welds shall comply with BS 5135.
An appropriate type and amount of testing of welds shall be undertaken by the Contractor in
accordance with BS 5135 or as directed by the Engineer.
Page 103 of 194

If the weld quality fails to comply with the requirements of this specification and in particular BS
5135, the weld shall be ground back and re-laid or as otherwise directed by the Engineer at the
Contractor’s expense.
2.11.8. BOLTING
2.11.8.1. General
Bolts in bearing type joints whether of commercial or high strength grades may have the thread
included in the shear plane.
At least one washer shall be placed under the bolt or nut, whichever is to be rotated when
tightening. Taper washers shall be used where the surface under the bolt head or nut is not
perpendicular to the axis of the bolt.
2.11.8.2. Mild Steel Bolts

Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, commercial grade steel bolts shall be used only for
anchor bolts and purlin and girt connections.
Mild steel bolts and nuts shall comply with BS 4190 or ASTM 4307.
2.11.8.3. High Strength Bolts

The use of high-strength bolts shall conform to the provisions of the Specification for Structural
Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts or approved equivalent.
2.11.8.4. Protective Treatment

The protective treatment to be applied to bolts shall be as shown on the Drawings. Unless noted
otherwise, all bolts shall be galvanized.
Contact surfaces of friction-type bolted joints may be primed with inorganic zinc silicate coating
prior to installation of the bolts but shall be free of any other type of paint.
2.11.9. DELIVERY
2.11.9.1. Handling and Storage

Steelwork shall be handled, transported and stored in a manner that will not cause permanent
deformation nor result in excessive damage to the protective coating. Members damaged during
handling and storing shall be liable to rejection.
Repairs to damaged steel and coating shall be carried out to the approval of the Engineer.
Steelwork delivered to the site shall be stored clear of the ground and separated from other
steelwork items until erected.
Bolts, nuts, washers and other small pieces shall be kept in grit free containers and stored in
weatherproof premises.
2.11.10. ERECTION
2.11.10.1. General
No erection shall commence until authorized by the Engineer.
All erection methods and plant, equipment, scaffolding and staging shall comply with the
applicable statutory regulations and directions of the Engineer.
Page 104 of 194

The Contractor shall adopt an erection procedure such that all members can be placed and fixed
in position without distortion.
During erection steel members shall not be cut, welded or drilled without approval. Drifting shall
only be used for bringing parts into position but not to match unfair holes not to enlarge holes or
otherwise distort metal.
At all times during erection steelwork shall be made safe against wind and other applied loading
conditions, including those due to erection equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for
assessing all requirements to ensure safety with the exception of any particular requirements
shown on the Drawings or otherwise specified.
Bracing, guying and other temporary members to facilitate erection shall be provided by the
Contractor without additional cost to the Employer and shall be affixed in a manner that does not
deform or deface permanent steelwork.
Upon completion of erection all temporary bracing, erection bolts and the like shall be removed
and the permanent steelwork made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.11.10.2. Tolerances
Tolerances for setting out the erection of steel work shall be in accordance with BS 5950.
2.11.10.3. Permanent Connections

No final tightening of bolts or permanent welding shall be carried out until sufficient members
have been erected to enable the work to be aligned, leveled and plumbed as specified.
2.11.10.4. High Strength Bolted Joints

High strength bolts shall be installed in accordance with the Specification for Structural Joints or
approved equivalent. Bolts shall be tightened location marked to check that the correct rotation
from the snug tight position has been obtained.
As bolts are finally tightened they shall be marked with paint or other indelible marker to ensure
that the work is systematically carried out.
Facilities shall be provided so that all joints can be inspected by the Engineer both before and
after tightening of the bolts.
2.11.10.5. Field Welded Joints

All field welding shall be carried out in accordance with BS 535. Particular attention shall be paid
to the precautions to be observed in adverse weather conditions. Work necessary for field
welding shall be thoroughly dry before welding.
2.11.11.PROTECTIVE COATINGS
2.11.11.1. General
Protective Coating shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5493 and BS 7079 or approved
equivalent. Coating materials, surface preparation and methods of application shall, except where
specifically varied by this Specification, be in accordance with the relevant Australian, British or
International standards. In particular, the type of surface preparation and the method and timing
of coating application shall be in strict accordance with the coating manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Page 105 of 194

To ensure compatibility of the layers of a coating system, the coating material used in all layers
shall be provided by the same manufacturer.
Before commencing preparation for coating, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for
approval, the name of the protective coating applicator and full details of the coating systems
proposed for use on the various steelwork in the work, including submission of manufacturer’s
descriptions and recommendations for surface preparation and for application.
2.11.11.2. Protection and Repairs

Coated steel shall be protected during transport, storage and erection to prevent damage to the
coating. Protection should include, but not be limited to, use of cloth slings, padding and blocking
during transport and storage clear of the ground and of adjacent stored members.
2.11.11.3. Hot Dip Galvanizing

All units to be galvanized shall be fabricated in sections of size suitable for the galvanizing baths
and galvanized after fabrication. Where medications, drain holes, etc. are required for galvanizing,
they shall be detailed on the shop drawings.
All steel work and metal work specified to be galvanized shall be hot dip galvanized to BS 729
providing a minimum of 600 g/m2 Zinc coating.
The galvanized surfaces of articles shall be from uncoated spots. The zinc coating shall be free
from blisters, flux, black spots, and projections, which will interfere with the proper use of the
article and from other from defects not consistent with good galvanizing practice.
2.11.11.4. Embedded Metal works

Ferrous metalwork to be embedded in concrete shall be cleaned of grease, paint and loose rust
before embedment, and shall not be coated unless required to be galvanized, except that surface
preparation and priming shall extend to a line not less 50 mm below the surface of the concrete.
2.11.11.5. Coating Materials

Materials used in protective coatings shall be in accordance with the following:
(a) Alkyd primer and oil alkyd primer, shall comply with the requirements of AS/NZS
3750.12:996.
(b) Alkyd undercoat shall comply with the requirements of AS 4025.2.
(c) Alkyd gloss shall comply with the requirements of AS 4025.1.
(d) Organic Zinc rich primer shall consist of powdered Zinc in an epoxy base and curing agent,
and shall comply with the requirements of AS 3750.9:1994, Type 2.
2.11.11.6. Coating Systems

The coating system required for steelwork and metalwork forming
COATING SYSTEM
PRIME COAT INTERMEDIATE FINAL COAT

COAT
System Surface Material Dry Material Dry Material Dry
Description Preparation Thickness Thickness Thickness
Page 106 of 194

Hand or Alkyd
Prime power Zinc 0.050
tool clean Phosphate
class 1
Hand or AlKyd
Prime and Power tool Zinc 0.050 Alkyd 0.040 Alkyd 0.040
Enamel clean class 1 Phosphate gloss gloss
primer
2.11.12.METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
The various items of structural and miscellaneous work shall be carried on as per approved
drawing and as such lump-sum price for entire steel work under this item shall be quoted for
payment.
2.12. BRICK FLAT SOLING
2.12.1. DESCRIPTION
The work covered by this item shall consist of supplying and laying bricks on top of the earth
bed or sand bed to form a sub-course.
Bricks shall comply with requirements of First Class bricks unless otherwise required by the
Engineer-in-Charge. The blinding sand will have a Fineness Modules of about 1.00 and shall be
clean, free from organic matters. Bricks shall be laid flat with frog mark top in surface to surface
contact with adjoining bricks and other joints shall be filled with sand. The sand shall be brushed
in unit the joints are filled. Flushing-in of sand with water will not be done unless permitted.
In case of Multi layer Soling, care shall be taken to stagger all joints in placing subsequent
courses of soiling.
Brick soling shall be measured by the square meter (sqm) of placing area.
The amount of completed and accepted work, measured as provided above, will be paid for at
the contract unit price per square meter (sqm) which price shall be full compensation for all
material, transporting, placing and all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the work.
2.13. BRICK ON EDGE PAVEMENT
2.13.1. DESCRIPTION
The item shall consist of laying 1st class Machine Made bricks on edge in lime-surki mortar
over a brick flat sub-course in accordance with these specifications and drawings.
Page 107 of 194

Materials shall meet requirements specified below and in the relevant sections of Materials
Specifications.
Brick for the paving course shall be of 1st class machine made brick free from cracks and edge
and surface defects.
The bed shall be prepared by excavation or filling as necessary to the required level and profile.
A brick flat shall be laid on the prepared sub-grade in surface to surface contract with adjoining
bricks and their joints shall be fully filled in with sand.
Bricks for the paving course shall be set in the pattern shown on the Drawings and shall be
bedded in a mortar consisting of 1 part of cement to 3 parts of sand. The vertical joints shall
be carefully filled in with same mortar after the bricks have been in place for at least 30 hours.
Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter (sqm) of actual built.
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided shall be paid for at the
contract unit price per square meter (sqm) which payment shall constitute full compensation
for furnishing all materials, equipment and labour excavation, filling, sand filling, compaction
and preparation of sub-grade, providing brick flat and concrete sub-course and installing Bricks,
as well as storage, transport, handling, preparing, mixing, curing, and all incidentals necessary
to complete the work as per application Plans.
2.14. BRICK WORK (250 MM OR MORE THICK)
2.14.1. DESCRIPTION
This item shall consist of constructing brick masonry work in 1:6 cement mortar in such
thickness and at such heights as required by the drawings.
All materials shall mean the requirements of the relevant sections of Material specifications.
a. Bricks shall be 1st Class brick unless otherwise required.

b. Cement shall be Portland cement Type-1 ASTM C-1.5
c. Sand shall be clean, well graded natural sand having a minimum FM of 1.5
d. Water shall be same as required for concrete.
Mortar for brickwork unless otherwise required shall consists of 1 part of cement and 6 parts of
sand.
Cement and sand shall be mixed dry in the specified proportions until the color of the mixture is
uniform. Water shall then be added sparingly, only the minimum necessary being used to
produce a workable mixture of normal consistency. The water cement ratio in no case shall
exceed 0.50 by weight, or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 108 of 194

The mixing shall be done on a clan hard platform within water-tight points to avoid leakage. At
the close of each day’s work, the mixing through and the pans shall be thoroughly cleaned and
washed.
Mortar shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Mortar, which has taken its initial
set, shall, on no account be used on work, not shall be remixed with or without additional
materials or re-tempered by other means.
2.14.3. WORKMANSHIP
No bricks shall be used until they have been thoroughly soaked in clear water for at least eight
hours. Soaking shall be discontinued one hour before use. Care shall be taken that the bricks
are clean and free from slime or dirt of any kind. If necessary, bricks shall be scrubbed clean.
Brickwork shall be built plumb and shall be carried up regularly throughout the entire length of
the structure. Unless otherwise specified bricks shall be laid in English Bond each brick being
set with mortar in bed vertical joints. All Bricks shall be whole expect where necessary for closer
and where expressly authorized. All horizontal joints shall be parallel and level. Vertical joints in
alternate courses shall come directly over one another. Joints thickness shall be minimum 6
mm and shall in no case exceed 10 mm. The height of four courses including four bed joints
as laid shall not exceed more than 40 mm the height of four bricks if put over one another.
Exposed joints shall be raked and flush pointed unless otherwise specified and the face of the
work shall be kept clean as work proceeds. The height of day’s work shall be limited to 1200
mm unless otherwise permitted. In exposed situations the day’s work shall be protected against
harmful effect of weather during and for a period immediately following construction until the
mortar sufficiently hardened. All brickwork shall be thoroughly cured for a period of at least 7
days.
Fixture in masonry such as anchors, clamps, brackets, pipes etc. shall be built-in during
construction at no additional cost to the contract.
This item shall be measured by cubic meter (cum) of brick work built in place to the next lines
of the structures shown on the drawings.
Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price per cubic meter (cum) of completed and
accepted work measured as provided above which price shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing, storing, transporting, preparing, laying and curing all materials and for all labour
scaffolding, tools and equipment and for all incidentals necessary to complete the item.
2.15. BRICK WORK (75 TO 125 MM THICK)
2.15.1. DESCRIPTION
The work covered by this item shall consist in constructing flat-brick, brick-walls with 1st class
bricks in 1:4 cement mortar and brick-on-edge brick-walls with first class brick 1:3 cement
mortar at any heights are required by the Plans.
Page 109 of 194

Materials and method of construction shall be as stated as above.
Brick partition walls shall be measured in square meter (sq.m) of actually exposed brick surfaces
wall deducting all opening and incorporated foreign structures, such as lintels, columns, beams,
etc.
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per square meter (sqm) of completed and
accepted work measured as provided above which price shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing, storing, transporting, preparing, laying and curing all materials and for all labour,
scaffolding, tools and equipment and for all incidentals necessary to complete the item.
2.16. MACHINEMADE CERAMIC BRICK WORK
2.16.1. DESCRIPTION
The worked covered by this item consist of constructing 50 mm & 100 mm thick brick work with
1st class clinker pressed machine made bricks laid normally or on edge 1:3 cement mortar
paste on wall, column, beam, floor and sun shed bottom and elsewhere required as per
drawings and instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
2.16.2. WORKMANSHIP
Brickwork shall be built plumb and shall be carried up regularly throughout the entire length of
structure by very skilled mason. Brick shall be laid as per design and drawing and only the
smooth face of the machine made bricks / clinker pressed brick shall be used as exposed face
/ floor. Thickness of horizontal & vertical joints will be as per drawing. Exposed joints shall be
raked and flush/groove pointed. The face of the work shall be kept clean as work proceeds. In
exposed situations the work shall be protected against harmful effect of weather during and for
a period immediately following construction until the mortar has sufficiently hardened. All brick
work shall be thoroughly cured for a period of at least 15 days.
Same as item no.2.14.4
Same as item no. 2.14.5
2.17. 12 MM THICK CEMENT PLASTER
2.17.1. DESCRIPTION
This item shall consist of providing 12 mm thick 1:6 cement – sand plaster on wall surfaces and
where necessary in accordance with these Specification.
Page 110 of 194

Materials shall meet requirements specified below and in the relevant section of Materials
specifications:
a. Cement shall be Portland cement Type-1, ASTM C-150
b. Sand shall be clean well-grade natural sand having a fineness module of 1.50
c. Water shall be portable and clean and contain no salt or organic materials
Plaster shall consist of 1 part of cement to 6 parts of sand and have a nominal thickness of
12mm.
Only enough water shall be added to provide plasticity. Mortar shall be mixed only in quantities
for immediate use. Mortar, which has taken initial set, shall not be used on the work with or
without addition of fresh materials.
Before application of plaster, the joints in brick-walls shall be adequately raked out where
necessary and smooth concrete surfaces shall be roughened to provide key. The surfaces shall
be scrubbed clean of loose materials and soaked with water and dept damped for 24 hours in
case of brick masonry and 2 hours in case of concrete before plastering. A neat cement coat
shall be applied on all concrete surfaces before placing plaster.
Plaster shall consist of two coats, under and finish, when applied over brick masonry and shall
consist of a grout application and finish coat when applied direct to concrete, the under and
finish coats shall be applied without any interval to permit the undercoat to set.
The undercoat shall have minimum thickness of 6mm and shall be leveled with straight-edge
and scratched for key, the finished coat shall be toweled over with care and leveled with a
straight-edge to obtain a flat smooth surface. All edges and corners unless otherwise shown on
the Plans shall be rounded or chamfered as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. All mouldings
shall be neat, clean and true to template.
Plaster shall be kept moist and protected from weather for 10 days immediately following
completion.
If any cracks appear in the plaster or any parts sound hollow when tapped or are found to be
soft or otherwise defective after the plaster has dried, the defect shall be made good by cutting
out and re-plastering at the Contractors own cost.
The work shall be measured in square meter (sq.m) of actual plastered surface.
Payment shall be made for the amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided
above at the contract unit price per square meter (sq.m) of plaster which price shall constitute
full compensation for furnishing all materials, mixing of mortar, plastering surfaces and corners,
plaster after completion, provision, erection and removal of scaffolding as well as incidentals
necessary to complete the work according to the applicable Plans.
Page 111 of 194

2.18. 12MM THICK PLASTER WITH NEAT CEMENT FINISH

2.18.1. DESCRIPTION
This item shall consist of providing 12 mm thick 1:4 cement sand plaster on wall surfaces and
where necessary including neat cement finish on top.
Similar to item no.2.17.02
Similar to item no. 2.17.03
Similar to item no. 2.17.04
2.19. PLASTER TO R.C.C. SURFACE

2.19.1. DESCRIPTION
This item shall consist of providing 6mm thick 1:4 cement-sand plaster on R.C.C. surface, ceiling
and where necessary in accordance with these Specifications.
Plaster shall consist of 1 part cement and 4 parts of sand and have nominal thickness of 6 mm
and shall be applied in a single coat. Materials and method of construction all other respects
shall be as required under item.
Same as stated in item no.2.17.3
Same as stated in item no.2.17.4
2.20. ARTIFICIAL PATENT STONE FLOORING
2.20.1. DESCRIPTION
The work covered by this item shall consist of constructing 25 mm / 38 mm thick (steel-
trowelled) 1:2:4 concrete topping with 10 mm downgraded stone chips, sand and cement in
panels not exceeding 900 mm on floor slabs and elsewhere in accordance with these
specifications.
Materials and construction shall be in accordance with the requirements of item 6.00 hereof for
concrete.
Page 112 of 194

The flooring shall be laid preferably not late than 24 hours after the floor slab is poured. When
flooring is to be laid on an older concrete slab, the base surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of
laitance and all loose materials by stiff wire brush, roughened if deemed necessary, and washed
and soaked and clean water. Surplus water shall be removed and neat-cement coating supplied
to the surface before flooring is placed.
The floor shall be divided into panels of specified sized by means of wooden battens. The top
of the battens shall be at the level of the finished floor surface.
The mixture shall be spared evenly between the battens in alternate panels and shall be uniformly
consolidated and leveled by a strike off. When the moisture has disappeared from the surface,
the surface shall be steel-trawled under firm pressure to produce a dense uniform smooth
surface free from trowel marks.
The dividing battens shall be removed carefully after 16 hours and the remaining panels shall be
completed in the aforesaid manner.
The neat cement application shall be minimum 2.0 mm thick. A little extra thickness shall be
allowed for polishing. The floor shall be polished, 3 weeks after it is laid, step by step, with
different grades of soft polishing store till a perfectly smooth glazy surface is obtained. The work
shall be cured and protected for at last 21 days immediately following the laying.
2.21. WOOD WORK (DOOR FRAME AND SHUTTER)

2.21.1. DESCRIPTION
The work to be performed under this section shall consist of finishing and installing of wooden
doors, windows, fixed panel, false ceiling, cabinets, handrails, partition, floor, stage, ventilators
and fan, light of the size and shape shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge including supplying and fixing of all finished hardware and glazing.
a. Detailed shop drawings of doors and windows nd other wooden works including glazing and
installation details, shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval.
b. Shop drawing shall include the submission of manufacturer’s literature, brochures and
delivery date for all finish hardware and manufacturer’s literature or specification for glass.
c. Manufacturer of fabrication of wooden doors shall not be started until the shop drawings have
been approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
2.21.3. SAMPLES
a. Within 35 days (thirty five) days after contract is awarded, the Contractor shall furnish for
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge a complete list in 4 (four) copies of all hardware proposed
for use on the contract, scheduling all hardware for every door.
b. Two pieces of samples of wood specimens 150 mm x 250 mm in area by 25 mm thick shall
be submitted for all types of wooden works for approval by the Engineer-in-Charge.
c. One sample of each type of finish hardware for doors and windows shall be submitted to the
Engineer-in-Charge for approval, the hardware shall be of the quality equal to or better than
the samples available in the Engineer-in-Charge’s office. Approved hardware samples may
be installed in the works or kept at site for verification of material supplied by the Contractor.
d. Two pieces of 150 mm x 200 mm samples of glass proposed for glazing shall be supplied
to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval.
Page 113 of 194

2.21.4. MATERIALS
a. Timber
Timber used for woodwork shall be well seasoned, kiln dry, free from large or loose knots, saps
and shakes and will be finished to the exact dimensions shown on the drawing or as directed
by the Engineer-in-Charge. The piece of wood shall be properly finished before joining and the
completed wood work shall be accepted by the Engineer-in-Charge before fixing in position.
1. Wood for frame : High quality Chittagong Teak & Shilkarai shall be used for frame work and
any where required.
2. Wood veneered flesh door shutter : Gammar veneered flash door shall be used for door
shutter or sash.
3. Wood for solid door shutter : High quality Chittagong Teak wood and Gammar wood shall be
used for solid door shutter and anywhere required.
b. Finish Hardware
1. Door hinges : shall be locally available, best quality brass hinge in size and attached with
no.8 steel screw 32 mm long, as approved the Consultant.
2. Door Stopper : shall be made from timber specified above and shall be 100mm long to act
as a stopper to keep the door in open position. Fix cleat with 65 mm steel hinge, “Lion”
approved equal attached with no.6 steel screws 20 mm long, “Diamond” or “Star” or
approved equal. Furnish one cleat per leaf.
3. PVC buffer block : shall be locally available best quality PVC block, 38 mm diameter and
attached to wall with no.8 steel screw 50 mm long. “Diamond” or “Star” or approved equal,
as shown on drawing or as directed. Furnish one block per leaf.
4. Door handle : shall be locally available best quality chromium plated 150 mm long handle
attached with no.7 steel screw 25 mm long. Furnish 2 handles per door, one inside and one
outside as approved by the Consultant.
5. Door towel bolts : shall be locally available best quality 250 and 200 mm brass bolts fitted
on the interior side of the door leaf, 250 mm long bolts shall be fixed at the top of the leaf
vertical and the 200 mm long bolts shall be fixed at the bottom of the door leaf vertically.
The 250 mm and 200 mm towel bolt with no.6 brass screw 20 mm long and as approved by
the consultant.
6. Hatch bolt : shall be locally available quality brass bolt 300 mm long attached with approved
bolts and nuts fitted on the outside of the door for locking arrangement as per direction of
the Consultant.
7. Widow hinge : shall be locally available best quality steel quality steel hinge, “Lion” or
approved equal, 75 mm x 50 mm x in size and fixed with no.7 steel screw 25 mm long
“Diamond” or “Star” or approved equal. Furnish three hinges per window.
8. Window handles : shall be locally available best quality Chromium plated 100 mm long
handle. “Lion” or approved equal. Furnish one handle per leaf at the centre on the inside.
9. Window catch hook : shall be locally available best quality, “Diamond” or approved equal,
galvanized iron 150 mm long catch hook. Furnish one catch hook per leaf.
10. Window tower bolt : shall be locally available best quality steel, “Diamond” or approved
equal, tower bolts 150 mm long fitted on the interior side of the window leaf. tower bolts
shall be attached with no.5 equal steel screw 20 mm long. “Diamond” or “Star” or approved
equal, and fixed vertically one each at the top and bottom on the interior side of the leaf to
close the window from inside.
c. Glass
shall be best quality locally available 3 mm clear glass panes with even surface and free from
imperfections. Cut glass to allow 1.70 mm to 3 mm clearance on all sides, the glass panes
Page 114 of 194

shall be fitted into rabbet not less than 20 mm wide with a thin layer of putty and secured
by strong iron shims, laid by 3 mm of wooden beat between frame and edge of sash and as
per direction of the Consultant.
2.21.5. FABRICATION
All wood work shall be fabricated to conform with the details and dimensions indicated on the
drawings and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
a. Door frame shall be properly cut, housed together and joined with mortise and tenon joints.
The frames will be rebelled on one side by a cut measuring 13 mm in one direct ion and the
full thickness of the shutter in the other. Frames shall be plumb and level with corners at right
angles. All exposed surfaces shall be sanded smooth. Back faces of wood which will be in
contract with or against concrete or masonry shall be treated with a minimum of two coats of
wood preservation such as creosote or solignum approved paint. Wood preservative to be
used shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
b. The frame shall be fitted vertically in position true and plumb and fixed M.S. clamps 375 mm
x 40 mm x 6 mm set in cement concrete within the masonry wall. There shall be ten/six
clamps, for door frames (as per drawing) and four clamps for window frames. The clamps
shall be fitted by making recess in the frame so that the frame nicely fits with the wall surface.
c. Door sash shall be of panel design and constructed as shown on the drawings. Panel-sash
frame shall be housed and joined with mortise and tennon joints. Panels for doors shall be
solid wood, placed properly in retaining grooves with 4 mm (3/16”) gap between adjacent
panels on all sides as indicated on the drawings.
d. Door frames and door sash shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge after assembling
and before installing in position.
e. All hardware shall be installed, and all door assemblies shall fit properly with minimum
clearances. Hinges shall be recessed flush with surrounding wood surfaces. All sash shall
be tested for proper and smooth operation without hinge bind.
f. After the door installation is completed all wood surfaces shall be French polished as
specified below :
Varnishing / French Polishing
i.All wood surfaces to receive varnish shall be cleaned from dirt, oil and other foreign
substances, the surfaces shall be made smooth by rubbing with sand paper. Recesses,
cracks, joints shall be filled with red lead and glue mixed in equal quantities and sanded
flush with the wood surface.
ii. Varnish shall be made by dissolving sheltac (Chanc gals) and methylated spirit (1 to 1.5
pounds of sheltac in 1 gallon of spirit ) andapplied over the finished surfaced with a piece of
lined cloth.
iii. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer-in-Charge no pigment shall be added to the
varnish.
iv. Three (3) coats varnishing shall be applied. While applying the final cast a little quantity
about 1 chhatak (14 pound) of “Karfa” shall be added to varnish prepared in above to
heighten the brilliancy of the varnished surface.
a. All wood door frame assemblies completed, including all hardware, installed in place, will be
measured in cubic meter of the installed frame.
b. All wood door leaf, fixed panel, false ceiling, partition, floor, assemblies completed, including
glass hardware and varnishing installed in place, will be measured in square meter of the
installed area.
Page 115 of 194

a. All wood door frame will be paid at the contract unit rate per cubic meter (cum) for the
measured volume of approved and accepted installed work.
b. All wood door and without leaf, fixes panel, false ceiling, partition, floor, etc. will be paid at
the contract unit rate per square metre (sq.m) for the measured area of approved and accepted
installed work.
2.22. VENEERED PARTEX FIXED PANEL

2.22.1. DESCRIPTION
The work covered by this item shall consist of supplying and fitting fixing Gammer Veneered
Partex Panel of the size and shape as shown on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge including supplying and fixing of all necessary hardware and meeting the requirement as
specified.
Similar to Door Shutter of Item 2.21.02 to2. 21.05.
Similar to Item 2.21.06.
Similar to Item 2. 21.07(b)
2.23. DOOR LOCK
2.23.1. DESCRIPTION
The work covered by this item shall consist of supplying, fitting and fixing cylindrical golden &
silver colour lock to doors including supplying and fixing of all necessary hardware.
Locks shall be fitted in the door at location shown on the drawing and according to the
manufacturers specification. The work includes making groove in the door and door frame,
finishing the same etc. complete. All the hardware necessary shall meet the requirements of
item 2.22 .
2.23.3. METHOD OF MEASUREMENTS
Measurement for payment shall be made for the actual number of locks at fitted in the door and
shown on the drawing.
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided shall be paid at the contract
unit price per lock which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials
Page 116 of 194

and hardware, and all equipment and labour in joinery, fitting, fixing, finishing, oiling as well as
incidentals necessary to complete the work according to the acceptable Plans.
2.24. HATCH BOLT

2.24.1. DESCRIPTION
The work covered by this shall consist of supplying, fitting, fixing brass hatch bolt to doors
including supplying and fixing of all necessary hardware.
Similar to item 2.23.02
Similar to item 2.23.02
Similar to item 2. 23.04.
2.25. MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORK

2.25.1. DESCRIPTION
The work to be performed under this section includes, but is not limited to, the furnishing and
installing of all structural steel and miscellaneous metal work, anchors, bolts, and fastenings,
and metal fabrications as shown and noted on the drawings and as specified herein.
Metal work includes the steel doors, the steel window and glazing thereof, the security grilles,
stair railing, collapsible gate, M.S. pipe hand rails rolling shutter, boundary gates and other metal
works shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The materials, fabrication, workmanship, and installation of the entrance gates shall conform to
the requirements of this section.
Submit fully details, large scale shop drawings of all structural steel and metal work, showing
sizes, details of fabrication and construction, methods of assembly, and installation details to
the Engineer-in-Charge for review and approval include manufacturer’s literature for fabricated
items, where necessary.
As welds, both shop and field, shall be indicated by standard welding symbols of the American
Welding Society, Drawing shall show the size, length and type of each weld.
2.25.3. MATERIALS
General : All materials shall be new and of the best commercial quality. Stock items shall be
well manufactured by concerns specializing in the particular items and subjected to approval of
the Engineer-in-Charge. Manufactured steel clips and angles will be accepted where such is the
obvious intent of the drawings.
Page 117 of 194

2.25.3.1. Steel Materials

a. Structural Shapes :All structural and miscellaneous steel members and components shall be
standard structural sections, shapes and plates, as indicated on the drawings, conforming to
ASTM A36 ( minimum yield point of 2530 kg.cm2). (36,000 psi) or approved equal.
b. Structural Tubing : Steel tubes, where indicated, shall be welded steel tubing, conforming to BS
1387:1967 (medium), of size and shape indicated on drawings.
c. Bars : Steel bars shall be made from billet steel and shall conform to ASTM A-616 or approved
equal.
2.25.3.2. Anchors, Bolts and Fastening
Bolts and studs, nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM A-307, A-449 and A-563, as
applicable or approved equal.
a. Anchors, Bolts and Fastening : Bolts and nuts, other than those with self locking screw thread,
shall be coarse-thread series. Bolts and nuts shall be the regular hexagon head types.
b. Washers : Round washers shall be American National Standard B 27.2 Type, or approved
equivalent. Cut washers shall be placed under all bolts and nuts, bearing on steel and at other
locations indicated on the drawings. Beveled washers shall be square, smooth, and sloped so hat
contact surfaces of bolt head and nuts are parallel.
c. Galvanizing :All exposed bolts, studs, nuts and washers shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A-153.
2.25.3.3. Pipe Sleeves

Pipe sleeves through concrete or masonry walls and footings shall be standard weight, wrought
iron, mild steel, or cast iron sleeves with not less than 6 mm space all around between the
sleeve and pipe or conduit.
Pipe
i. Pipe for handrails, railings, and pipe guards, if shown on the drawings, shall be welded steel
pipe conforming to ASTM A-53, Type E or S, grade A or approved equal. All pipe shall be
galvanized pipe.
ii. Pipe for gate frames and other locations indicated on the drawings shall be welded steel pipes,
conforming to BS 1387 (medium), pipe fitting, where indicated or required (if any), shall conform
to ASTM A-420. Standard manufacturer’s weldable steel pipe, conforming generally to the
foregoing requirements, will be acceptable. All pipe and pipe fittings shall be galvanized.
2.25.3.4. Electrodes
All arc-welding electrodes shall conform to AWS standards for steel Arc-Welding Electrodes.
Electrodes shall be rods or wire of size and classification number as recommended by their
manufacturers for the positions and other conditions of actual use.
2.25.4. CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS:
Where anchors are not included in the concrete or masonry construction, anchors shall be
Phillips “Read Head” Concrete or Masonry Anchors on manufactured by Phillips Drill Co. “Wej-
lt” Expansion Products, Inc., or equal of the sizes and
2.25.5. WELDED CONNECTIONS
Welders shall be experienced in the type of welding work to be performed. If at nay time the
quality of a welder’s work is not satisfactory, as determined by the Engineer-in-Charge, the
welder shall be replaced.
Page 118 of 194

Welded connections shall be made in accordance with AWS D1.I.
Welds exposed in the finished work shall be ground and dressed smooth so that the shape and
profile of the item welded is preserved. Embedded metal frames for floors and deck openings
shall be with continuous welds at corners, ground smooth where exposed to view.
Railing shall be fabricated in straight run sections with top and intermediate rails, posts and
flange connections welded ready for installation in the field. Splices where required shall be
reinforced with sleeved within the pipe and secured with set screws on the underside of the pipe.
2.25.6. SHOP CLEANING AND PAINTING
All structural steel materials shall first be thoroughly cleaned by mechanical means to remove
all mill scale, rust, grease, oil and any other foreign matter. Field welds shall be thoroughly wire
brushed. After cleaning, steel and iron materials shall be washed with phosphoric acid to
remove dust and residue to assume maximum paint adherence.
After cleaning and washing, steel and ferrous metal materials shall be primed with one coat of
approved red lead primer, the Contractor shall submit the manufacturer’s specification for
approval prior to applying. Steel in the vicinity of a proposed field weld, facing surfaces of bolted
joints, or steel to be encased in concrete shall not be painted.
2.25.7. INSTALLATION
General
i. Installation of miscellaneous metal work and metal fabrications shall be in accordance with
drawings and approved shop drawings, true and horizontal and perpendicular, as the case
may be, plumb, level and square, with angles and edges parallel with related lines of the
work.
ii. Shop fabricated items subjected to damage shall be braced and carefully handled to prevent
distortions or other damage.
iii. Items to be installed before concrete is placed shall be properly braced to prevent distortion
by pressure of concrete.
iv. Field welding, where required, shall conform to the requirements specified for shop
fabrication.
Anchors, Bolts, Studs and Fasteners
i. All anchors, bolts and washers, inserts etc. as required for the installation and completion of
the work and other miscellaneous steel or iron fastenings to be installed in forms before
concrete placement, or built into concrete, shall be provided as indicated on drawings, details,
and schedules at the time schedule for the concrete work. Bolts and anchors shall be present
by the use of templates or such other methods as may be required to locate the anchors and
anchor bolts accurately.
ii. Expansion bolts, where approved, shall be carefully installed in snug-fitting, smoothly drilled
holes, all in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Expansion bolts shall be
installed so that the load acts on the bolt in shear and withdrawal. Expansion bolts shall be
carefully located in order to eliminate the risk of damage to concrete reinforcement and other
embedded items. Expansion bolts shall not be used except where indicated on Drawings or
where first approved by the Engineer-in-Charge in writing.
Page 119 of 194

Base and Bearing Plates : Bases and plates and pipe posts where shown in the drawings shall
be set accurately using a high strength, non-shrink grouting mortar as hereinbefore specified to
obtain uniform bearing. Grouting mortar shall be mixed and installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s specifications and instructions. Surfaces to receive the grout shall be cleaned
and moistened thoroughly immediately before the grout is placed. Exposed surfaces of grout
shall be water-cured with wet burlap or rags for 7 days.
Doors, Windows and Gates : Door, windows units and entrance gates shall be expertly installed
with all hardware and accessories furnished and installed as shown on the drawings and as
required for complete and finished installations. Doors, windows and gates shall operate properly
and smoothly at completion. Glazing of windows and gates shall operate properly and smoothly
at completion.
2.25.8. PAINTING
After installation of steel work and metal fabrications, abraded areas, field areas, field bolts, and
welds to be touched up and spot shall be painted with the same corrosion-inhibitive primers as
were used for shop painting. Field welds shall be thoroughly wire brushed or sanded prior to
touch up painting.
All metal surfaces shall then be painted with three costs of an approved enamel exterior paint for
metal as manufactured by “Berger” or approved equal.
The various items of structural and miscellaneous metal work, as indicated on the drawings and
specified herein, will be measured by the various units listed in the Bill of Quantities.
Structural and miscellaneous metalwork will be paid for at the various contract unit rates quoted
in the Bill of quantities for the installed work, measured in place.
2.26. ALUMINIMUM DOORS, WINDOWS, CURTAIN WALLS, CURTAIN

RAILS,ETC.
2.26.1. DESCRIPTION
The work under this item shall consist of supplying and fixing aluminum products of various
types such as doors, windows, curtain wall, curtain rail, cladding/flushing of sills, window grills,
etc. fitted with necessary hardware, glass and finished in accordance with applicable drawings
and specifications.
2.26.2. MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
Doors, Windows & Curtain Walls: Aluminum Doors, windows, curtain walls etc. shall be of
approved standard conforming to the U.S. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturing Association
(AAMA) or equivalent specifications. The frames and such members shall be of extruded shape
made of 6003-T5 high quality aluminum alloy having a minimum section thickness of 1.8 mm
Page 120 of 194

unless otherwise shown on the drawings or indicated in the schedule of items and shall conform
to U.S. Aluminum Association or equivalent standard.
Fasteners, Hardware and Anchors: Fasteners, hardware and anchors shall be o aluminum or
non-magnetic, non-corrosive material compatible with aluminum. All windows shall be provided
with non-jamming latches of rocker type designed to be locked from inside. Window locks
shall be flush type as manufactured by the Adams Rite Manufacturing Company of Glendale,
California or approved equivalent. The doors shall be provided with cylinder lock and suitable
built-in-non-jamming latches and bolts.
Security locks shall be pin type mortise lock, 6 or 7 pins and adoptable to Master, Grand Master
and Great Grand Master Keys. Sliding windows and doors shall be fitted with adjustable sealed
baring sheaves of durable hydrated nylons or approved equivalent. Closer, push / pull and kick
plates shall have to match with the frames. Any other hardware to be incorporated in the work
shall also match with the frame. Assembly and installation screws shall be of stainless steel.
Doors, windows, curtain walls etc. shall be installed with Teflon injected expanding bolts, sills
shall contain adequate provisions for drainage. Head, sills and jamb members shall be of one
piece construction. Aluminum to aluminum contact between hardware parts or moving members
shall not be permitted. Such contracts shall be properly insulated.
Glazing Beads : Glazing beads shall be aluminum shape-in interchangeable type.
Weather Stripping :Weather stripping shall be of neoprene or silicon treated woven wood or
approved equal.
Joints :All joints shall be mechanically done square (telescopic) joints. No mistral joints shall
be accepted. No forced fitting shall be accepted. All units shall be fabricated at the factory to
accurate dimensions. It shall be rigid and designed to permit complete weather stripping. In
principle, the parts should be put together by self tapping screws.
Surface Finish :All exposed surfaces of aluminum members shall be factory finish and of
substantially inform appearance conforming to “Architectural” standard.
All exposed surfaces shall be given a natural Anodic Oxide Hardcore coating of 15 micron in
thickness and a density of 25 mg. per square inch and a uniform colour tone conforming to the
U.S. Aluminum Association or equivalent standard. The colour spectrum shall be an lock. Finish
of hardware shall match closely with the door/window/curtain wall finish.
Accessories :Accessories necessary for proper fixing and operation such as anchors, clips,
fins, sub-frames, metal sills, mullion, covers, cashing, other trim, cleaning anchors, glazing
beads, weathering and glazing strips, hardware and mechanical operators shall be supplied
ready to set in place with the door, window, curtain wall units. All accessories shall be foreign
made best quality as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Steel or wood sub-frames shall be painted with Zinc Chromatic primer in case of steel and with
wood preservative in case wood. Steel anchor shall be properly insulated from aluminum frame.
Sealant : Sealant shall be one part elastic compound of “Architectural” grade caulk and shall be
in matching colour.
Page 121 of 194

The Contractor shall prepare detailed design of all work involved in line with the Consultant’s
design and prepare shop Drawings for the total work and a submit to the Consultant for approval
before factory fabrication. All exterior doors, windows and curtain walls shall be designed to
with stand a wind pressure of 180 kg./cm2 or as specified in guide drawing.
All units shall be assembled at site under proper conditions, erected, fixed and glazed in place
in strict conformity with Manufacturer’s instruction. All cut-out operations for hardware
preparation shall be made accurately and reinforced as required.
All doors, windows, curtain walls, etc. shall be set plumb, square, level and in exact alignment
with surrounding works and shall be securely anchored ready for operation. All joints between
the masonry opening and frames shall be caulked and sealed after installation of the frames. All
installation works shall be done & finished in such a way as to ensure a free & smooth operation.
Abrasion or other injury to finished surfaces shall be carefully avoided. Cleaning should be
accomplished with plain water or a petroleum type cleaning agent or with the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning reagent. No corrosive reagent shall be used.
All aluminum door and window frame shutter with glass assemblies complex including all
hardware, installed in place will be measured in square metre(sqm) of the installed frame.
All alluminium door and window frame shutter with glass will be paid at the contract unit rate pr
square metre (sqm) for the measured area of approved and accepted installed work which price
shall constitute full compensation for material, labour, fitting fixingetc. all complete.
2.27. FALSE CEILING (GYPSUM BOARD)

2.27.1. DESCRIPTION
The work under this item consists of thermal acoustical insulation of ceiling as specified in the
drawings and schedule of items.
Materials for false ceiling shall be made of noncombustible extruded aluminium channel, mineral
fiber or gypsum board titles of thickness 12 mm and size 600 mm x 1200 mm or as required
and suspended from reinforced concrete roof by means of adjustable height suspension system
and on a frame work of galvanized steel or aluminum cross rails, furring channels, furring
channel joineries, locking keys fasteners, renal plugs etc. and aluminum ceiling tees or any other
approved section of approved quality.
The ceiling tiles shall be supplied with adjustable height, corrosion resistant metal, suspension
systems with necessary accessories all in adequate quantities as recommended by the
manufacturer. Rates shall be inclusive of every material, labour accessories tools and plants
etc. to produce the false ceiling complete in all respect.
Page 122 of 194

False ceiling including all hardware, installed in place will be measured in square metre (sqm) of
the installed frame.
All aluminium channel, mineral fiber or gypsum board tiles will be paid at the contract unit rate
per square metre (sqm) of the measured areas of approved and accepted installed work.
Page 123 of 194

Page 124 of 194
CHAPTER 03: SANITARY, PLUMBING AND GAS LINE WORKS
3.A. PLUMBING
3.1. GENERAL
All materials are to be supplied and installed by the Contractor.
The run and arrangement of all pipes shall be approximately as shown in the Drawings and as
directed during installation and shall be as straight as much as possible. All riser shall be erected
parallel with walls and other pipes and shall be neatly spaced. All concealed pipes in floors or walls
shall be laid before the construction is closed up. All horizontal pipes except where concealed in
partitions shall be kept as high as possible and close to walls. All pipe interiors shall be thoroughly
cleaned of foreign material before installation and shall be kept clean during installation by plugging
or by approved means. All GI pipe shall be suitable for threaded joint and to withstand a pressure
of 250 psig.
G.I. pipe work shall be complete with unions for every 6.5 m of pipe of any diameter. Approved
type of pipe supports/suspensions and brackets shall be used at an interval specified below:
3.2. G.I. PIPE :

Supply, fitting and fixing of G.I. pipe complete with bends, tees, unions, reducers, sockets etc.
according to specification and as per direction. Samples of pipes to be used in the construction,
shall be supplied by the Contractor for approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Approved samples shall be retained by the Engineer-in-Charge and shall be used as standard of
comparison for the materials delivered to the site and used in the Contract. Galvanized iron pipes
shall have socket joints with threaded ends.
Threads at the end of the G.I. pipes and inside the socket shall be examined and cleaned. Damaged
threads shall be cut with sharp dies. Before installation thread shall be coated with approved jointing
compound (Graphite and oil mixed) and the pipes shall be fitted into the socket tightly with the help
of chain tongs or wrenches.
If a pipe is embedded in wall with insufficient cover (less than 38 mm) or if it is carried exposed it
shall be supported by clamps and nails/nuts and bolts according to approved designs/methods.
The distance between supports shall not exceed 760 mm and U-bolt shall not be less than 10mm.
Pipes vertical or horizontal within shaft or exposed shall be clamped to wall or hanged from roof
using approved type of bolt, pipe support, hanger etc. Pipe shall be supported or hanged at an
interval of 3 m. Hanger bolt or support shall have sufficient strength to bear weight of pipe with
water. All M.S. material shall be painted with two coats of red oxide paint before installation. All
pipe works shall be concealed and embedded in wall, floor roof and below grade or ground unless
otherwise specified.
In brick walls, the pipes shall be surrounded by concrete 1:3:6 at least 38 mm thick all around. The
coarse aggregate of the concrete being 10 mm down graded of jhama brick chips/gravel and fine
aggregate being medium sand.
All valves shall be installed as per drawing and direction. Approved type of sealing compound or
Teflon tape shall be used on thread to make threaded valve joint water tight. During cutting of thread
on pipe care must be taken not to damage or break threads.
Page 127 of 194

Approved type gasket shall be used between flanges of flanged end valve. Nut, bolt shall be properly
tightened to make the joint water tight under test pressure. Cement or permanent joint shall not be
used at any circumstances.
After complete installation, piping system along with pipe fitting shall be tested under 175psig
pressure for 2 hours and 100psig pressure for 24 hours. Testing devices along with pressure
gauge and pump shall be arranged by the Contractor. Test report shall be submitted to the Engineer-
in-Charge for approval. Pressure test shall be done in presence of the Engineer-in-Charge. After
acceptance of pressure test the system shall be made free from all dirt and foreign materials.
Method of Measurements : Measurement for payment shall be made for the actual linear
meter (m) measured along the piping axis, including fittings of any description.
Basis of Payment : The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above
shall be paid for at the corresponding contract unit price per metre (m) which payment shall
constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials including necessary fittings, specials and
valves, all equipment and layout including, storage, handling and transport of materials, installation
and fixing of brackets, fixing bolts and screws, cuttings, tapping, installing and connecting of
pipes, fittings, valves and sleeve pipes, making holes or chase in wall or floor if necessary and
restoration thereof to original condition, excavating pipe trenches back-filling and compacting,
connecting to the city main as well as all incidentals, necessary to complete the work according to
the applicable plans.
3.3. VALVE AND FITTING

All valves shall conform to British Standard Specifications and shall be of adequate size and
strength to withstand a test pressure of 150psig a in general but 100psig for external distribution.
They shall be fitted in such position so as to ensure easy and smooth operation. Defective valves
and installations shall be rejected and shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own cost.
All valve shall be positioned in such a way so that it can operate easily and can be serviced easily.
Valve shall be individually supported, clamped or hanged. Approved type of hanger support etc.
shall be used.
3.3.1. GATE VALVE
Gate valves of appropriate size shall be as per schedule.
3.3.2. GLOBE VALVE
Globe valves shall be fitted as per drawing and direction. The valve shall be as per schedule.
3.3.3. CHECK VALVE
Check valves shall be silent type. The valve shall be of sufficient strength to operate under a
pressure condition where it is installed. In installation of check valves, care shall be taken to place
it in the correct position and that a valve designed for a horizontal pipe is not placed on a vertical
pipe or vice versa.
3.3.4. STRAINER:
Strainers shall be of Y pattern set in a horizontal run of the pipe. It shall be so arranged as not to
'trip' pipes and must have the facility of disconnection and opening up for cleaning. The strainer
shall have cast iron or bronze bodies and shall have removable cylindrical or conical S.S. strainer.
Page 128 of 194

3.3.5. PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
Pressure reducing valve shall be installed on pipe in horizontal level at the entrance of the pipe over
false ceiling to room connections. The fitting of the valve shall be proper. Pressure reducing valve
shall be suitable to maintain a constant pressure at outlet as specified in the schedule. Valve shall
be suitable to maintain pressure whether there is flow or no flow of water.
3.3.6. AUTOMATIC VENT VALVE
Automatic vent valve shall be free floating type as per schedule. Vent valve shall be installed at
every highest point of horizontal line and shall be as per direction. Drain port of the vent valve shall
be connected with pipe extended upto nearer drain.
Method of Measurements: Measurement for payment shall be made for actual number of
acceptable installed item taken as complete units.
Basis of Payment: The amount of completed and accepted works shall be paid for at the contract
unit price which payment shall constitute installing and connecting to water pipe including
alljointing materials and fittings.
3.4. PRESSURE GAUGE

Pressure gauge shall be direct reading type and shall be suitable for installation on G.I. pipe. The
gauge shall be of 100 mm dia dial type and shall be screwed in type for installation of 6 mm dia
nipple on G.I. pipe. The pointer shall be plain type black finished, red tipped with white background
and shall be suitable to read 0 to 18 Kg/Cm2 pressure. Pressure Gauge shall have both British as
well as S.I. unit scale. All fittings and accessories for mounting on pipe shall be supplied. Pressure
gauges shall be complete with pet cock.
Pressure gauge shall be installed by the contractor at location shown in the drawing or as per
direction of the Engineer-in-Charge using 3 mm tap on the main pipe. Pressure gauge shall be well
positioned so that reading can be taken easily.
Method of Measurement :Measurement for payment for Pressure Gauge shall be on the basis of
complete installed unit properly tested and approved.
Basis of Payment : The amount of completed and accepted works shall be paid for at the contract
unit price which payment shall constitute installing and connecting to water pipe including all
jointing materials and fittings.
3.5. FOOT VALVE

Foot Valve shall be flanged end type complete with companion flanges, nuts, bolts, gaskets etc.
The valve shall be installed as per drawing and direction. Valve shall be suitable to withstand a
pressure of 100psig
Method of Measurement :Measurement for payment for Foot Valve shall be on the basis of
complete installed unit properly tested and approved.
Page 129 of 194

3.6. UPVC PIPE & PIPE FITTING

All uPVC pipe and pipe fitting such as Pipe, P-trap, S-trap. Y-joint, T-joint, Bend, Door bend, Offset
Bend, service door, Loose socket, Vent Cowl adopter etc. shall be as per ASTMD-792 standard.
Specification of pipe and pipe fittings of uPVC pipe shall be as follows;
i) Specific gravity 1.40

ii) Hardness 120 Rockwell R
iii) Water Absorption 5.7- 8.5 x 10-6
iv) Tensile strength at 15C 500-550 kg/cm².
v) Bending Strength 850 kg/cm²
vi) Compressive strength 650 kg/cm²
vii) Shearing strength 400 kg/cm²
viii) Elongation at UTS 100-170%
ix) Modulus of Elasticity 4.10x105 kg/cm²
x) Impact strength 5.0 kg-cm/cm²
xi) Flame Resistance Self Extinguishing
xii) Softening Temperature 75C
Pipe dimension shall be as follows;
Dia of pipe Nominal dia of pipe Minimum wall thickness
300 mm 300 mm 6.5 mm
250 mm 250 mm 6.2 mm
200 mm 225 mm 5.5 mm
150 mm 160 mm 4.5 mm
100 mm 110 mm 3.4 mm
80 mm 82.4 mm 3.0 mm
50 mm 55.75 mm 2.4 mm
40 mm 42.75 mm 2.2 mm
Before installation all pipe fittings shall be cleaned properly.
Pipe fittings shall be installed as per drawing and direction. Fittings shall be located in such a way
so that clean out door shall be accessible easily. Hangers, clamps or wall bracket shall be used
at all ends of each fittings and it shall be of approved type.
Pipe joints as per schedule shall be sufficiently water tight to withstand a water column of 4 m.
Approved type of solvent shall be used for pipe and pipe fittings joint. All M.S. material required
shall be painted with two coats of red oxide paint before installation.
Page 130 of 194

3.6.1. Y-JOINT
Supply, fitting and fixing of Y-Joint shall be all hub end type and shall be with door as per schedule
shall be as per drawing and direction. Any leak or sweating in the wall or at the Joint shall not be
acceptable. Before fixing, fitting shall be properly cleaned.
3.6.2. T-JOINT
Supply, fitting and fixing of T-Joint shall be with hub on all end and with service door and shall be
as per schedule drawing and direction. Before fixing T- Joint shall be leak tested by water. Any leak
or sweating in the wall or at the Joint shall not be acceptable.
3.6.3. P-TRAP
Supply, fittings, fixing, of P-Trap, U-trap, S-trap etc. shall be with hub in inlet and 50 mm dia vent
connection and shall be as per schedule, drawing and direction. Trap shall be P or S type as per
site requirement. Each trap shall be provided with vent door. Water level inside trap shall be within
19 mm to 25 mm above air break.
Before fixing, fittings shall be properly cleaned.
3.6.4. BEND
Supply, fittings, fixing, of Bend shall be with double hub and shall be as per schedule, drawing and
direction. uPVC. Bend shall be provided with clean out door as per site requirement. Long Bend or
Short Bend shall be provided as per direction.
3.6.5. DOOR BEND
Supply, fittings, fixing, of Door Bend shall be with double hub and shall be as per schedule, drawing
and direction uPVC Door Bend shall be provided with clean out door as per site requirement. Long
Door Bend or Short Door Bend shall be provided as per direction.
3.6.6. OFFSET BEND
Supply, fittings, fixing, of Offset Bend shall be with double hub and shall be as per schedule,
drawing and direction uPVC offset Bend shall be provided with clean out door as per site
requirement. Offset Bend shall be provided as per direction.
3.6.7. VENT COWL
Supply, fittings, fixing, of Vent Cowl as per schedule shall be as per drawing and direction. Before
fixing, fittings shall be properly cleaned.
3.6.8. LOOSE SOCKET
Supply, fittings, fixing, of Loose Socket with both side hub to adopt straight pipe and shall be as
per schedule.
Method of Measurement :Measurement for payment for listed items under Clause 6 shall be on
the basis of complete installed unit properly tested and approved.
Page 131 of 194

3.7. R.C.C. PIPE

Concrete pipe shall be used for underground drainage purpose. These shall be of reinforced
concrete machine made, best quality available in Bangladesh. The thickness shall be as per
standard practice and approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
Socket joints shall be made compact with shrouded jute socked with cement. The end of the collar
shall be finished off with stiff mixed mortar 1:1 proportion of cement and sand trawled to a convex
fillet. Pipes shall be laid as per drawing on C.C. bed over a brick flat soling inside the trenches.
After laying of the pipes trench shall be refilled with earth layer including watering and to be as
compact as possible.
Excavation of trenches for drains shall be made true to drawing and gradient. Over excavation shall
be avoided. If over excavation is done, this shall be filled up by the contractor at his own cost with
1:5:7 cement concrete in jhama chips and medium sand, if during excavation existing utility lines
are exposed they shall be well secured according to Engineer-in-Charge's instruction. Care shall
be taken for securing the utility lines. The width of the trench shall be at least 355mm greater than
the diameter of the pipe.
Any shorting and de-watering required during excavation shall be done at the Contractor's own
cost. Before laying the pipes, inspection and approval of the Consultant shall be sought and secured
by the Sub- Contractor.
All excavation material shall be deposited away from the edge of the trench keeping at least
460mm margin concrete bedding of the pipes and joints and filling of the trench shall not
commence till the drain pipes are inspected and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. A depth of
300mm above the top of the pipes shall be filled by hand packing of selected soil out of the spoils.
It shall be watered liberally and compacted with great care.
In selecting the soil for filling, all lump and clods larger than 25mm size shall be powdered or
avoided. The filling above this 300mm shall be done in the usual way as specified under side filling
of trenches. If the route is covered with grass, during excavation of trenches, the top grades bearing
layer shall be separately preserved and replaced after filling the trench and nursed till original grass
cover is restored. The work of preservation of grass top and relaying will not be paid separately,
its cost being deemed to have been included in the rate for pipe laying. Surplus spoils of excavation
shall be disposed according to the instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
No bend or junction shall be used in the buried drain pipes except at inspection chambers. All
junctions shall be oblique. Immediately after the drains are laid and jointed but before bedding in
concrete they shall be inspected, tested and passed by the Engineer-in-charge as satisfactory. The
testing shall be done by water pressure for a head 3m more than the highest point. Testing may be
done section by section.
The trench bottom shall be rammed and compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
The drain pipe shall be laid and supported on false supports. The jointing shall then be done and
after the pipe network is tested under pressure and approved by the Engineer-in- charge the
concrete bed in 1:3.5:5.5 using 6 mm down jhama bricks chips and medium sand shall be placed.
The width of the bed at the bottom will be 350mm wider than the internal diameter of the pipe. The
side slopes will join the edges of the bottom of concrete bed and the pipe tangentially. The depth
of concrete bed shall be 100mm minimum below the pipe and shall be increased at joints as
needed to maintain 100mm minimum from socket surface bed shall be cured for 10 days.
Page 132 of 194

Breaking of wall/floor and making good the damages properly shall be done by the Contractor at
his own cost and upto the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. Most of the fixing work as much
as permissible shall be done before finishing work. After finishing wall/floor breaking, cutting etc.
shall not be permitted without Engineer-in-Charge's approval.
Method of Measurements : Measurement for payment shall be made for the actual linear
metre (m) measured along the piping axis, including fittings of any description.
shall be paid for at the corresponding contract unit price per metre (m)
3.8. TOILET/KITCHEN ROOM FITTINGS

Supply of each item of Toilet fittings shall conform to specifications and schedule of items and
shall be fixed in position as per approved drawing and direction upto the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-charge.
Measurement of the work for payment shall be on the basis of each set properly installed and
approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
Breaking of wall/floor if required and making good the damages properly shall be done by the
Contractor at his own cost and upto the satisfaction of the Engineer-in- Charge. Most of the fixing
work as much as permissible shall be done before finishing work. After finishing wall/floor breaking,
cutting etc. shall not be permitted without Engineer-in-Charge's approval.
3.8.1. STOP COCK
Supply, fitting, fixing of stop cock as per schedule. Stop cock shall be screwed end type suitable
to be installed on threaded end. G.I. pipe of dia 13 mm. Approved type of sealing compound or
Teflon tape shall be used on pipe thread to make the joint water tight. The contractor shall have to
submit sample of stop cock to the Engineer-in- Charge for approval. If the stop cock does not
withstand test pressure it will not be acceptable. Stop cock shall be well positioned so that
Measurement for payment for stop cock shall be on the basis of complete installed unit properly
tested and approved.
3.8.2. ANGLE COCK
Supply, fitting, fixing of Angle cock shall be as per schedule. Contractor shall have to submit sample
of Angle cock, best quality available in the market, to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval. Each
and every Angle cock shall be pressure tested by the contractor. The cock which will not be able
to take test pressure and will be rejected.
Approved type of sealing compound or Teflon tape shall be used on pipe thread before fixing of
threaded end Angle cock on G.I. pipe work.
3.8.3. OPEN TAP
Supply, fitting, fixing of open tap shall be as per schedule. Contractor shall have to submit sample
of open tap, best quality available in the market, to the Engineer- in-Charge for approval. Each and
every tap shall be pressure tested by the Contractor. The tap which will not be able to take test
pressure will be rejected.
Page 133 of 194

threaded end open tap on G.I. pipe work.
3.8.4. COOL PILLAR COCK
Supply, fitting, fixing of Cool Pillar cock shall be as per schedule. Contractor shall have to submit
sample of Pillar cock, best quality available in the market, to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval.
Each and every tap shall be pressure tested by the Contractor. The tap which will not be able to
take test pressure will be rejected.
threaded end Pillar cock on G.I. pipe work.
3.8.5. BASIN MIXTURE
Supply, fitting, fixing of Basin mixture shall be as per schedule. Contractor shall have to submit
sample of Basin mixture. Best quality available in the market, to the Engineer- in-charge for
approval. Each and mixture shall be pressure tested by the contractor. The tap which will not be
able to take test pressure will be rejected.
Approved type of sealing compound or teflon tape shall be used on pipe thread be fore fixing of
threaded end mixture on G.I pipe work.
3.8.6. SHOWER MIXTURE
Supply, fitting, fixing of Shower mixture shall be as per schedule. Contractor shall have to submit
sample of Shower mixture. Best quality available in the market, to the Engineer- in-charge for
approval. Each and mixture shall be pressure tested by the contractor. The tap which will not be
able to take test pressure will be rejected.
3.8.7. KITCHEN SINK MIXTURE
Supply, fitting, fixing of CP Kitchen Sink mixture shall be as per schedule. Contractor shall have to
submit sample of Kitchen Sink mixture. Best quality available in the market, to the Engineer- in-
charge for approval. Each and mixture shall be pressure tested by the contractor. The tap which
will not be able to take test pressure will be rejected.
3.8.8. KITCHEN ROOM SINK COCK
Supply, fitting, fixing of CP Kitchen Room Sink Cock shall be as per schedule. Contractor shall have
to submit sample of Kitchen Room Sink Cock, best quality available in the market, to the Engineer-
in-Charge for approval. Each and every Cock shall be pressure tested by the contractor. The Cock
which will not be able to take test pressure will be rejected.
threaded end mixer on G.I. pipe work.
Page 134 of 194

3.8.9. BOTTLE TRAP
Supply, fitting, fixing of CP Bottle Trap shall be as per schedule. Contractor shall have to submit
sample of Bottle Trap, best quality available in the market, to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval.
threaded end of Bottle Trap. Any other consumable such as nipple, washer etc. required for
installation of Bottle Trap with Basin, Sink, Stand Urinals etc. shall be provided by the contractor.
All connections shall be leak proof. Thread of trap shall be good enough to protect leakage when
closed.
3.8.10. WASHING HAND BASIN
Supply, fitting, fixing of super vitreous China clay washing basin shall be as per schedule. Washing
basin shall be installed at location shown in the drawing and as per direction of Engineer-in-
Charge. C.I wall bracket shall be fixed on wall by using approved type of rowel bolt. Before fixing,
bracket shall be painted with two coats of paint over a coat of primmer. Pedestal type washing
basin shall be with combined central pillar cock of CP brass, rubber plug with CP chain.
3.8.11. KITCHEN SINK
Supply, fitting, fixing of best quality stainless steel Kitchen Sink (Single/Double) shall be as per
schedule. Kitchen Sink shall be installed at location shown in the drawing and as per direction of
Engineer-in-Charge. C.I wall bracket shall be fixed on wall by using approved type of rowel bolt.
Before fixing, bracket shall be painted with two coats of paint over a coat of primmer.
Sink shall be placed over wooden/concrete cabinet where and when used as per direction and no
loose settings shall be accepted. Steel Sink shall be provided with rubber plug with CP chain.
3.8.12. PEDESTAL
Supply, fitting, fixing of super vitreous China clay Pedestal shall be as per schedule. Installation of
Pedestal with Wash basin shall be well fitted at location shown in the drawing and as per direction
of Engineer-in-Charge.
3.8.13. FLEXIBLE CONNECTION
Supply, fitting, fixing of Stainless Steel flexible connection pipe shall be as per schedule. The
Contractor shall have to submit to the Engineer-in-charge the sample of flexible pipe best quality
available in the market for approval. Both end of the flexible pipe shall be complete with C.P. flare
nut and socket to adopt 13 mm dia threaded end.
3.8.14. AUTOMATIC SHOP DISPENSER
Supply, fitting, fixing of Automatic Shop Dispenser with Battery-operated system. To complete the
shop dispenser shall be wall type fixed at location shown as per schedule. The Contractor shall
have to submit to the Engineer-in-charge the sample of soap dispenser American standard best
quality.
Page 135 of 194

3.8.15. AUTOMATIC HAND DRYER
Supply, fitting, fixing of Automatic Hand Dryer with AC-Operated system. Complete the Hand Dryer
shall be wall type fixed at location shown as per schedule. The Contractor shall have to submit to
the Engineer-in-charge the sample of soap dispenser American standard best quality.
3.8.16. NEW MADERA COMMODE (COMBI)
Supply, fitting and fixing of New Madera Commode shall be as per schedule and approval. The
contractor shall have to submit one complete set of the sample of Commode to the Engineer-in-
Charge for approval.
The commode shall be of wash down closed suit with horizontal out go to closet bowl and the
cistern shall have the capacity to contain and flush down about 11 liters of water at each flush.
The closet bowl shall be provided with 4 holes for fixing into the floor with four round headed
wooden screw. The cistern shall be provided with a flush bend and float valve to control the water.
The W. C. shall have holes suitable for fitting the vent pipe.
The cistern closet bowl and bend shall be white/colored glazed high polish and of porcelain ware
of proprietary products of American Standard or approved equivalent.
The commode shall be installed at a distance not less than 300 mm from the back wall. It shall be
screwed with the floor with four wooden screws. The closet shall be placed at least 300 mm apart
from the adjacent side wall. The seat shall be black or as specified, heavy duty, solid plastic
complete with cover and self sustaining hinge. The flush equipment shall be of silent fitting type.
3.8.17. AMERICAN SQUAT (LONG PAN)
Supply, fitting and fixing of Long pan shall be as per schedule and approval. The contractor shall
have to submit one complete set of the sample of long pan to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval.
The long pan shall be of wash down pan suit with horizontal out go to closet bowl and the cistern
shall have the capacity to contain and flush down about 11 liters of water at each flush.
The pan bowl shall be provided with 4 holes for fixing into the floor with four round headed wooden
screw. The cistern shall be provided with a flush bend and float valve to control the water. The long
pan shall have holes suitable for fitting the vent pipe.
The cistern pan bowl and bend shall be white/colored glazed high polish and of porcelain ware of
proprietary products of American Standard or approved equivalent.
The long pan shall be installed at a distance not less than 300 mm from the back wall. It shall be
screwed with the floor with four wooden screws. The closet shall be placed at least 300 mm apart
from the adjacent side wall. The seat shall be black or as specified, heavy duty, solid plastic
complete with cover and self sustaining hinge. The flush equipment shall be of silent fitting type.
3.8.18. STANDING URINAL (VACUUM BREAK)
Supply, fitting and fixing of supper vitreous porcelain standing urinals shall be as per schedule and
direction. Urinal shall be complete with all other accessories as per schedule. Waste pipe shall be
properly clamped to wall by using U-bolt.
Urinal shall be installed at location shown in the drawing and as per direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
Urinal shall be directly clamped to wall by using screws. Urinal shall be complete with automatic
Page 136 of 194

cistern with flashing arrangement. Measurement for payment shall be made on the basis of
complete supply,
Fitting, fixing of unit set and accepted by Engineer-in-Charge.

3.8.19. SHOWER ASSEMBLY
Supply, fitting and fixing of Shower Assembly shall be as per schedule and complete with all
standard accessories and fitting.
Shower Assembly shall be installed as per drawing and direction Engineer-in-Charge and shall be
fitted to pipe end by using approved type of sealing compound to make the joint water tight.
Wall/Ceiling Shower head shall have at least 20 nos. of 0.8mm dia hole and shall be suitable to
maintain a pressure of 20psig maximum. Shower Head shall be provided with air inlet to admit air
above trapped water to avoid drip.
Telephone type shower shall be complete with stainless steel flexible metal connection chain,
handle, holder to fix the shower handle on wall clamp. Stainless steel flexible pipe shall be 600mm
length. One end shall be connected with Shower Head and other end shall be suitable to fix with
13mm dia G.I. pipe.
Wall clump shall be fixed to wall by using two nos. of counter sunk screws and plastic plug
of approved type.
3.8.20. GLASS MIRROR
Supply, fitting, fixing of beveled edge plate glass mirror of American made and shall be 5 mm thick
silvered Electro coppered with red back.
Mirror shall be fitted on wall, at a height as directed by Engineer-in-Charge with plastic plug. At
back ply wood of 6 mm thick shall be provided for damp protection. Corner of the glass shall be
rounded and polished. Glass plate shall be fixed through four nos. of 6 mm holes with CP screws.
3.8.21. GLASS SHELF
Supply, fitting, fixing of glass shelf with CP bracket shall be as per schedule and direction of
Engineer-in- Charge. Edges of the glass shall be properly rounded and polished. Clamping
arrangement of glass plate with bracket shall be provided.
CP bracket shall be fixed to the wall properly by using plastic bolt and CP screws.
3.8.22. TOWEL RAIL
Supply, fitting, fixing, of chrome plated, brass towel rail of size 610mm x 25mm dia shall be
complete with CP wall bracket. Each leg of bracket shall be fixed to the wall by using two nos. of
plastic plug and screws.
3.8.23. C.P SOAP CASE
Supply, fitting, fixing of chromium plated soap case shall be of plate type as approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge. The contractor shall have to submit best quality of local market available soap
case to the Engineer-in-Charge for selection and approval of soap case.
Page 137 of 194

Soap case shall be fixed on wall with two Nos. of plastic plug and counter sunk screw. Location
of the soap case shall be as per drawing and as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.8.24. C.P. TOILET PAPER HOLDER
Supply, fitting, fixing of chromium plated brass toilet paper holder complete with wall bracket,
wooden roller, fixing screws etc. The contractor shall have to submit best quality of available paper
holder for approval. Paper holder shall be rigidly fixed to the wall at location as approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
3.8.25. 3-PIECE UPVC STRAINER
Supply, fitting, fixing of uPVC Square Strainer shall be as per schedule and approved quality.
Contractor shall have to submit best quality of locally available strainer to the Engineer-in-Charge
for approval. Strainer shall be fixed on floor drain.
3.8.26. C.I. GRATINGS
Supply, fitting, fixing of CI gratings shall be as per schedule and approved quality. Contractor shall
have to submit best quality of locally available gratings to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval.
Gratings shall be fixed on floor drain.
3.8.27. AUTOMATIC WATER HEATER
Supply, fitting, fixing of Automatic water Heater of capacity shall be as per schedule. Inside
container shall be rust proof galvanized steel pressure tested to leaks. Out side jackets shall be
sprayed with scratch and rust proof high gloss backed enamel paint. Inner container shall be
insulated with fiber glass placing in between inner and outer jackets.
The Water Heater shall be provided with automatic pressure release.
Method of Measurement :Measurement for payment for the Toilet and Kitchen Fittings shall be on
the basis of complete installed unit (No. or Piece) properly tested and approved.
shall be paid for at the corresponding contract unit price per No. or Piece.
3.9. CATCH PIT

The work covered by this item shall consist of construction of Catch chamber on the underground
rain & waste pipes where necessary. Catch chamber shall be as per schedule and drawing and to
be constructed with concrete bottom on brick soling, 250mm brick walls with water proof
plastering in side and pre-cast reinforced concrete slabs having lifting arrangement with heavy MS
rod grating . Rod Grating or wrought iron steps of approved quality are to be provided inside catch
chamber. All necessary earth work shall be done by the Contractor upto the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
Measurement for payment shall be made on actual number of catch chamber of each type
constructed and accepted by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 138 of 194

3.10. INSPECTION PIT

The work covered by this item shall consist of construction of inspection chamber on the
underground drainage and sewerage pipes where necessary. Inspection chamber shall be as per
schedule and drawing and to be constructed with concrete bottom on brick soling, 250mm brick
walls with water proof plastering in side and pre-cast reinforced concrete slabs having lifting
arrangement with heavy cast iron cover. Cast iron or wrought iron steps of approved quality are to
be provided inside inspection chamber. All necessary earth work shall be done by the Contractor
upto the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Measurement for payment shall be made on actual number of inspection chamber of each type
constructed and accepted by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.11. C.I. COVER

Supply and installation of heavy duty C.I. manhole covers shall be as per schedule and conforming
super grade local quality and shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
3.12. SEPTIC TANK

Septic Tank of different sizes as specified in the schedule shall be done by the contractor. All
necessary earth work in excavation and shorting, bailing out water and side filling including the
cost of all materials, operations and incidental charges etc. all complete shall be done as per Type
plan upto the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
Construction of Septic Tank in position shown in the drawing with brick work in cement mortar
(1:6) as per approved type plan over a brick flat soling and 150mm thick cement concrete flooring
(1:2:4) with 125mm thick walls in partition and 20mm thick cement plaster (1:4) to insides of walls
with N.C.F. and 25mm thick patent stone (1:2:4) flooring with N.C.F. and the size of the Septic
Tank chambers shall be as per drawing and direction following Indian Standard Codes.
Supplying, fitting and fixing of two nos. of R.C.C Tees as per drawing and providing 500mm dia
water sealed heavy type C.I. Manhole Cover with locking arrangement. Top slab of the Septic Tank
shall be constructed with 100mm thick R.C.C (1:2:4) with minimum 1% reinforcement including
centering, shuttering, fabricating, casting and curing etc. complete upto required depth. Cast iron
or wrought iron steps of approved quality shall be provided on inside wall of Septic Tank.
Measurement for payment shall be made for actual number of Septic Tank of each type
constructed, finished and accepted by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.13. WASA CONNECTION

Wasa connection shall be provided as per drawing, direction and approval of the Wasa authority.
Required all construction work and earth finishing as per direction shall be provided by the
contractor.
3.14. WATER SUPPLY PUMP

The pump shall be factory rated and shall be of single/ multi stage end suction, vertical discharge
centrifugal type complete with coupled pump motor and starter.
The pump shall be highly volute type with flanged discharge branches. The suction cover shall be
supplied with flanged pipe connection. The impeller shall be highly efficient shrouded single suction
type and shall be statically balanced to ensure smooth operation. Stuffing box shall be packed with
Page 139 of 194

high quality gland packing and incorporate a wear resistant pressure reducing bush. The shaft shall
be constructed of light quality treated (steel) material and shall have sufficient strength (robust) so
as not to vibrate to any speed within the operating range of the pump.
Bearing shall consist of two heavy duty ball bearing firmly located within a strong cast iron frame
and effectively sealed against ingress of dust and moisture. The discharge cover and suction cover
shall be provided with gauge taping and fixed with pressure gauge of appropriate scale.
The pump set shall be completed with pump motor starter, discharge and suction flange,
companion flanges for suction and discharge pipe, adopting rigid steel base plate holding down
bolts, heavy gauges coupling guards, spring type vibration isolator suitable for inertia block. All list
of detail accessories must be supplied along with the offer. The pump starter shall be drip proof
with push button, starter coil shall be 230V + 5%, single phase and shall be completes with one
set of auxiliary contact point for control connection and shall be suitable for remote push button
operation.
The Contractor shall carry and installation complete pump set on foundation pad made by the
Contractor. Vibration isolator shall be used. The foundation shall be approx. 152 mm and minimum
51 mm grouting. All pipe and electrical connections shall be done by the Contractor and pump
shall be properly aligned. All cost of consumable materials shall be included in the rate quoted.
Method of Measurements :Measurement for payment shall be made upon complete pump-motor
set installation testing and commissioning as per specification, drawing and direction. The
contractor shall bear responsibility for supplied material and equipment.
Basis of Payment :The amount for completed and accepted work shall be paid for at the contract
unit price which payment shall constitute man, material, storage, transportation, consumable which
ever needed for the successful commissioning of the pump motor set including connecting suction
line to the ground water reservoir and the discharge line to the supply riser pipe with suction and
delivery conventional pump fittings.
3.15. SUMP PUMP

The pump shall be suitable for disposal of 146 litre/ minute water, having a discharge head of
10 m. from sump well at the basement which collect waste water from excess water from excess
water from the floor and other places. Float and float switch shall also be supplied for automatic
operation of the pump at pre-determined water level at sump.
It shall be fitted with an open type impeller which a capable of handling solids in suspension upto
1 mm diameter. The pump unit shall be installed on a solid base and shall be connected with
suction pipe with screen. The impeller part shall be submerged in the liquid and therefore the pump
will be prime at all times.
The float control shall be provided with a reliable automatic control at any desired water level within
the scope of the maximum/minimum level. The pump body and base shall be of high grade cast
iron. The pump shaft shall be stainless steel alloy. The pump bearing shall be self-lubricating
bearing bush ensuring maximum life.
Page 140 of 194

Measurement for payment shall be made upon complete pump-motor set installation testing and
commissioning as per specification, drawing and direction. The contractor shall bear
responsibility for supplied material and equipment.
The amount for completed and accepted work shall be paid for at the contract unit price which
payment shall constitute man, material, storage, transportation, consumable which ever needed
for the successful commissioning of the pump motor set including connecting suction line to the
ground water reservoir and the discharge line to the supply riser pipe with suction and delivery
conventional pump fittings.
3.16. PUMP PANEL

Supply, fitting, fixing of pump panel shall be constructed with 16 BWG sheet steel painted with
two coats of stove enamel paint of approved colour over a coat or primmer. Panel box shall have
single hinged door of plane type hinge and shall be provided with handle and locking arrangement.
Knob of the main MCCB shall be projected beyond front panel. The panel shall incorporate
following accessories suitable for 415 V/50 Hz/3 Phase power supply.
 MCCB
 4 Nos. of HDHC copper bus bars
 1 No. of copper Earthing block
 Ammeter with selector switch, volt-meter with selector switch on-off-trip indicating lamps for
both the pump.
The MCCB shall be quick-make, quick break type and shall have inverse time limit characteristics
with instantaneous magnetic trip element, over load and short circuit protection through thermal
magnetic trip action.
Panel shall be complete with all interlocking, control wiring. Panel shall be installed at location
shown in the drawing and as per direction of Engineer-in-Charge. As consumable material
required for supply and installation of control panel shall be supplied and installed along with the
panel.
Measurement for payment shall be made for the whole electrical work including connecting supply
power main to the panel and control wing complete in all respect as per specification.
Payment shall be made only upon installation of panel and its connected wiring to show automatic
functioning of the pumps as described in this specification.
Page 141 of 194

3.17. ELECTRICAL CABLE CONTROL, WIRING FOR PUMP

Supply, fitting, fixing of all electrical cable, control wiring etc. complete with M.S. conduit ECC pull
box, junction box etc. for providing electrical.
Power to pump from pump panel and all control cable required for pump interlocking sensor on
over head and under ground reservoir shall be under this item.
Power cable from paper to pump motor shall be as per Eastern Cable and all control cable shall be
1 C 1.5 mm2 NYY M.S. conduit of approved size shall be used.
M.S. conduit shall be complete with bends, fees, socket, junction box, pull box etc. as per direction
and recommendation. Conduit shall be properly clamped to wall or floor or hanged from roof by
using 6 mm2 U-bolt or approved type of fixing devices at an interval not more than 3 m.
Measurement of the work shall be lump sum basis on completion of installation work and
energizing the system.
The payment shall be made on lump sum basis as described in Bill of Quantities upon completion
of the whole work.
3.18. FERRULE CONNECTION

Supply, fitting, fixing of ferrule connection complete with water meter piping bends etc. shall be as
per direction and recommendation of local water supply authority. Under this item contractor have
to arrange all the formalities required for providing city water connection to under ground reservoir.
He has to arrange water meter from water supply department.
Measurement for payment shall be made on complete installation of ferrule connection at the
contract unit price including road cutting trench excavation for laying GI service pipe, installing
water meter & stop value and mending good the road in original form or back filling etc. The GI
pipe work from ferrule upto the float valve in water reservoir shall be paid as per G.I. pipe work
rate in schedule.
The amount for work shall be paid upon completing installation of the water incoming service line
and filling the ground water reservoir in moderate flow rate.
Page 142 of 194

3.B. SOIL, WASTE AND RAIN WATER PIPING

3.19. UPVC SEWERAGE PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
uPVC sewer pipes & fittings manufactured in grey/ white color with a gloss finish, which is opaque
& flow less, shall have the capacity of absorption of light; and this shall minimizes effect to the
sun’s heat & ultra-violet radiation. All sewer pipes are repetitively branded in accordance with
SS.213 specification of B.S 4514, sizes from 50 mm to 160 mm wide buildings under the ground
out side the building.
SS-213-1979
Normal size Mean Outside Diameter In Min. Wall Thickness (mm)
Inch (mm) In Min In Max. Min. Max.
3’2” 50 55.70 56 2.40 2.70
4” 100 110 110.40 3.20 3.60
6” 150 160.50 159.50 4.00 4.50
BS-4514
Normal size Mean Outside Diameter In Min. Wall Thickness (mm)
Inch (mm) In Min In Max. Min. Max.
4” 100 110 110.40 3.20 2.80
6” 150 160 60.60 3.30 3.90
All uPVC sewerage pipe and pipe fitting such as U-Trap. Y-joint bend with door etc. shall be as per
schedule.
Pipe fittings shall be installed as per drawing and direction & with the approved of Engineer-in-
Charge. Fittings shall be located in such a way so that door shall be serviceable easily. Hangers,
clamps or wall bracket shall be used at all ends of each fittings and that shall be of approved type.
Measurements for payment shall be made for the actual number of linear metre (m) measured
along the piping axis including fittings using suitable jointing solvent recommended by the pipe
maker. Joints shall be of the spigot and socket type having the socket formed integral with the
pipe or alternatively, separate sleeves may be used with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
The vertical discharge pipes shall be provided at the head with the copper or brass strainer of
approved size and construction which will give a leak proof connection with the roof slab. The pipe
shall discharge to gully by a back inlet. Bend at the foot of pipe shall be properly formed and of
adequate radius.
Page 143 of 194

The amount of complete and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the
unit contract price per metre (m) which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing
all materials, equipment and labor including storage, handling and transport of materials,
installation, connecting of pipes with all fittings and jointing materials, excavation and for all
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
3.20. RAIN WATER DRAIN PIPE

Roof drain strainer shall extend not less than 100 mm above the surface of the roof with available
strainer area, above roof level, 2 times the area of the rain water down pipe to which it is connected.
This is to avoid.
Clogging of the line by leaves and other debris that may accumulate. Removable strainer, flashing
to be made water tight with drain.
Base of RWDP shall be connected to drain pit at proper fall and invert height.
Pipe to be inserted in column reinforcement box and shall be permanently jointed as per approved
manner, before casting of the columns.
uPVC, RWDP shall be BESTEC/NPI/ uPVC brand or similar and shall cleaned internally and
externally.
Similar to item no.4.19.1.2
Similar to item no..4.19.1.3
3.21. SEWER PIPE

Concrete pipe shall be used for underground drainage purpose. These shall be of reinforced
concrete machine made, best quality available in Bangladesh. The thickness shall as per standard
practice and approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
Socket joints shall be made compact with shrouded jute socked with cement. The end of the
collar shall be finished off with stiff mixed mirror 1:1 proportion of cement and sand trawled to a
convex filet. Pipes shall be laid as per drawing on C.C. bed over a brick flat soling inside the
trenches.
Alternately uPVC pipe 6/8” dia may be used as per schedule & normal standard specification.
After laying of the pipes trench shall be refilled with earth layer by layer including watering and to
be as compact as possible.
Excavation of trenches for drains shall be made true to drawing and gradient. Over excavation shall
be avoided. If over excavation is done, this shall be filled up by the contractor at his own cost
Page 144 of 194

with 1:5:7 cement concrete in jhama chips and medium sand, if during excavation existing utility
lines are exposed they shall be well secured according to Engineer-in-Charge’s instruction. Care
shall be taken for securing the utility lines. The width of the trench shall be at least 355 mm greater
than the diameter of the pipe.
Any shoring and de-watering required during excavation shall be done at the Contractor’s own
cost. Before laying the pipes, inspection and approval of the Consultants shall be sought and
secured by the Contractor.
All excavated material shall be deposited away from the edge of the trench keeping at least 460
mm margin concrete bedding of the pipes and joints and filling of the trench shall not commence
till the drain pipes are inspected and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. A depth of 300 mm
above the top of the pipes shall be filled by hand packing of selected soil out of the spoils. It shall
be watered liberally and compacted with great care.
In selecting the soils for filling all lump and clods larger than 5 mm size shall be powdered or
avoided. The filling above this 300 mm shall be done in the usual way as specified under side
filling of trenches. If grass covered during excavation of trenches, the top grades bearing layer shall
be separately preserved and replaced after filing the trench and nursed till original grass cover is
restored. The work of preservation of glass top and relaying will not be paid for separately, its cost
being deemed to have been included in the rate for pipe laying. Surplus spoils of excavation shall
be disposed according to the instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
No bend or junction shall be used in the buried drain pipes except at inspection chambers. All
junctions shall be oblique immediately after the drains are laid and jointed but before bedding in
concrete they shall be inspected, tested and passed by the Consultants as satisfactory. The testing
shall be done by water pressure for a head 3 m more than the highest point. Testing may be done
section by section.
The trench bottom shall be rammed and compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
The drain pipe shall be laid and supported on false supports. The jointing shall then be done and
after the pipe net work is tested under pressure and approved by the Consultant, the concrete bed
in 1:3:5 using 6 mm down graded jhama bricks chips and medium sand shall be placed. The
width of the bed at the bottom will be 350 mm wider than the internal diameter of the pipe. The
side slopes will join the edges of the bottom of concrete bed and the pipe tangentially. The depth
of concrete bed shall be 100 mm minimum below the pipe and shall be increased at joints as
needed to maintain 100 mm minimum from socket surface. The concrete bed shall be cured for
10 days.
Breaking of wall/floor making good the damage properly shall be done by the Contractor at his
own cost and upto the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. Most of the fixing work as much as
permissible shall be done before finishing work. After finishing wall/floor breaking, cutting etc.
shall not be permitted without Engineer-in-Charge’s approval.
Measurement shall be made for the actual number of linear metre (m) of pipe laid and completed.
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the
correct unit price per running meter (m) of pipe which payment shall constitute full compensation
for furnishing all materials, equipment and labour including setting out of trenches, laying and
Page 145 of 194

connecting pipes, testing for water tightness of joints and for providing all excavation, granular
bedding and back filling etc. necessary to complete the work according to applicable drawings.
3.C. GAS LINE PIPES

3.22. GAS LINE WORKS
Gas connection pipe lines are included in this section as they are to be laid by similar materials as
in sanitary and plumbing works. However, these works are to be carried out as per specification
lay by Titas Gas and Distribution Co. (TGTDC) and to be done through an Titas approved contractor.
Gas pipe lines will be measured similar to water pipe lines.
Payment will be done similar to water line works.
Page 146 of 194

CHAPTER 04: ELECTRICAL WORKS
4.SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

4.1. STANDARD CODES AND REGULATIONS
The installation in general shall be carried out in conformity with the Electricity Rules of the Govt. of
Bangladesh (Indian Electricity Act and Rules as adopted in Bangladesh), and the 14th edition of THE
REGULATION FOR THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OF BUILDINGS of the Institute of Electrical Engineers
(London), hereinafter referred I.E.E. wiring regulations and the British Standard code of Practice for the
relevant works. But where the under noted specifications differ from these rules and standards, the
specification written hereunder shall be followed. Any special requirement of the Electrical Inspector,
Govt. of Bangladesh or the Power Development Board, or the Telegraph and Telephone Board, or any
other Legal Authority shall also be complied with at no extra cost to the Employer.
Only licensed skilled workmen, authorized by the Government of Bangladesh to undertake such
electrical works under the provision of the Indian Electricity Act and Rules as adopted in Bangladesh
shall be engaged under the direct supervision of full time electrical supervisor having a certificate of
competency for the type of work under execution. The name of Electrical Supervisor and particulars of
his license shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer-in-charge
4.2. WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
The materials used or supplied by the Contractor and workmanship must be approved quality. The
Tenderer shall supply and fix all cables, wire, conduits, switches, ceiling roses, all consumables,
materials and labour etc. Complete in every respect. Besides all yools and tackles, the contractor shall
also provide ladders, planks, scaffolding etc. For his own use cost and expense to the satisfaction of
the Engineer-in-charge and these will be removed from site at his own cost after the completion or
work. The materials shall, if not specifically mentioned otherwise, generally conform to the British
Standards. If the specifications contained herein differ from B.S. the specifications and stipulations
written hereunder shall have precedence.
4.3. SAMPLES
Samples of conduit, cables, bends, socket outlets, fans, luminaries, switched sockets, steel boxes,
various fittings, etc, shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-charge for his approval prior to use and this
shall be kept in his office (properly tagged) till completion of the entire job. Materials actually used in
the work must conform to such approved sample.
4.4. SETTING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT:
The setting of conduit runs, cables, controls, fittings, accessories, etc., shall be in accordance with the
drawings and settled on site in conjunction with the direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. Any deviation
from the drawings and specifications shall be always properly written and entered as built. The height
from finished floor level to the bottom of fitting shall be as follows, unless otherwise specified in the
drawings or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
i. Switches … 4’-6” from F.F.L.
ii. Fan Regulators … 4’-6” from F.F.L.
iii. 5 Amps Socket Outlets … 0’-9” from F.F.L.
iv. 15 Amps Socket Outlets … 0’-9” from F.F.L.
v. Telephone Socket Outlets … 0’-9” from F.F.L.
vi. Pendants and other interior brackets … 8’-0” from F.F.L.
Page 149 of 194

4.5. CUTTING AND REPAIRS
The Contractor shall perform all excavations in the ground and fill the same as laid down hereinafter.
Conduits shall be placed neatly into masonry works and the grooves filled in with 1:2:3 cement concrete
or in 1:3 cement mortar (depending on the size of grooves) making good all walls and ceilings, if
damaged during installation of boards and fittings. No extra payment shall be made for this.
4.6. LAYOUT OF CIRCUITS, POSITION OF POINTS
The Contractor shall do the work according to the drawings and specifications and the layout of circuit
shall be as laid down and/or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. No work shall be allowed to be
deviated without prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Shifting of any point, switch board or other
fitting from that shown on the drawings, if required, shall have to be approved by the Engineer-in-
Charge. No extra charge shall be allowed for such shifting.
4.7. CONDUIT WORK
4.7.1. GENERAL
The work under this item consists of supply and installation of rigid, water grade PVC conduit with
G.I pull wire and necessary accessories concealed or exposed in/on floors, roof slabs, walls and
column where necessary in accordance with drawing, specification as stated hereunder and
direction of the Engineer-in-charge.
PVC pipe shall be of standard manufacture to meet the requirement of BS 4607, NEMA TC-2 and
WC-1094 water grade rigid PVC conduit must have 1.72mm wall thickness and pressure tolerance
217 P.S.I for conceal in roof slabs or column and rated 90°C cable. Junction boxes, Pull boxes,
circular boxes, bends, sockets, elbows etc., shall be made of PVC or other similar inert synthetic
materials, press fitted and then sealed with PVC, solvent cement or by any other standard glue as
prescribed by the manufacturers. When sheet steel accessories are used except pull or junction
boxes shall be fabricated form 16SWG plain either galvanized or black enameled over two prime
coat. Rubber bushes are to be fixed at the conduit and where it enters the sheet steel boxes through
knock outs. Each junction boxes shall have and earth point where earth continuity conductor can
be connected. The circular boxes shall be of PVC materials with ¾” long hub and machine screwed
cover. Pull wires, to draw the copper conductors through conduits shall be of 10SWG and
galvanized.
The conduits to be concealed in slabs shall be installed along with G.I. Pull wire in between top
and bottom bar immediately after placement of reinforcement bar as per applicable routing shown
on the drawing. Conduits shall be tied with bar by 2X20SWG., G.I. wire @ 3’-0” c/c. Conduits
over false ceiling will remain exposed. All these non-concealed conduits are to be secured with
concrete surface or timber frame by galvanized saddle or cleats @ 1’-6”c/c. concealed conduits
in concrete wall or column surface shall be placed along with shuttering or form work before
concrete poured in.
Any change in routing necessitated because of job condition shall have prior approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge. All such change shall be marked on the plans as field records. Conduits in
brick wall shall be installed during construction of wall. No chasing in masonry wall shall be allowed
without prior approval.
Page 150 of 194

PVC Pipes shall be bent either by using a hot box bending or by using flame. In any event bending
radii shall be 0’-6” minimum. The conduit run shall be continuous throughout its length and kept
straight as far as possible. It shall have either horizontal or vertical run but shall never run at an
angle. Routing of conduits in between walls at right angle shall be not allowed.
All conduit run shall be kept at least 6” clear of gas, sewerage, water and other services pipes.
Where necessary it shall be rerouted or set out to maintain the specified separation.
In installation the conduits particular care shall be taken in cutting them to the proper lengths so
that the ends will fit exactly in to the outlet boxes. After installation the open end shall carefully be
plugged with a bushette to prevent intrusion of plaster, dust etc.
All conduits along with accessories required for complete installation shall be furnished and
installed in a best workmanship manner.
i. PVC Conduit
PVC conduit must conform to NEMA TC-2 and WC 1094 designed for installation in
underground, in slabs, encase or exposed. These shall be heavy rigid type – 40, rated for
90o cable. Recommended specification of PVC conduit of schedule A-1 are as follows :
Schedule-A.1
Nominal Pipe Outside Dia Inside Dia Wall Thickness Wt. of PIpe
Size
in mm in mm in mm in mm lb/ kg/
100ft 100 m
½” 12.7 0.84 21.33 0.62 15.80 0.11 2.77 16 23.85
¾” 19.05 1.05 26.67 0.82 20.83 0.115 2.92 22 32.80
1” 25.4 13.15 33.27 1.04 26.44 0.135 3.43 32 47.71
1¼” 31.75 1.66 42.66 1.38 35.05 0.14 3.55 43 64.11
1½” 38.1 1.90 48.26 1.61 40.89 0.145 3.68 52 77.53
2” 50.80 2.37 60.19 2.06 52.32 0.155 3.94 69 102.87
Appropriate samples shall be submitted for prior approval before installation
ii. G.I. Pipe

G.I. Pipe shall be as per Schedule A-2. Inside surface of the pipe must be free from any
burs. All G.I. bends shall be performed and shall be of same material as the pipe.
Recommended specifications of G.I. pipe of the schedule A-2 are as follows :
Page 151 of 194

Schedule-A.2
Nominal Pipe Outside Dia Inside Dia Wall Wt. of PIpe

Size Thickness
in mm in mm in mm in mm lb/ kg/
100ft 100 m
1” 2.54 1.31 33.4 1.05 26.64 0.133 3.38 1.678 2.50
1½” 3.81 1.90 48.26 1.61 40.89 0.145 3.68 2.717 4.05
2” 5.08 2.37 60.33 2.06 52.50 0.154 3.91 3.652 5.44
2½” 6.35 2.87 73.03 2.57 65.25 0.203 5.16 5.790 8.63
3” 7.62 3.50 88.90 3.07 77.97 0.216 5.48 7.570 11.28
Appropriate samples shall be submitted for prior approval before installation

iii. Junction Boxes, Pull Boxes, Circular Boxes, etc.
Junction boxes and pull boxes shall conform to BN.S. 4662 and shall be made of 16 SWG
(minimum) sheet steel galvanized, or any other materials as directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge, depending on where it is installed to match with the existing construction in which
these are installed. The circular boxes shall be of PVC. The cover of the metallic boxes should
be fixed by using countersunk brass screw or galvanizes machine screw. Box ears shall be
at least 14 SWG. Each box (except circular boxes) must have an earth block of copper of
brass of appropriate size (minimum) 9.5 mm x 9.5 mm x 9.5 mm (3/8” x 3/8” x 3/8”) block
with 4.76 mm (3/16”) drilled hole being for one earthing lead and 3.175 mm (1/8”) machine
screw (tapped for 24 t.p.i) where earth continuity conductors shall be screwed in. The
circular boxes shall have at least 12.7 mm (1/2”) long hub.
Appropriate samples shall be submitted for piror approval before installation of these boxes.
4.7.2. INSTALLATION
i. PVC Conduit / G.I. Pipe
In general, pipes shall have concealed installation sand shall be placed over the re-bar as per
drawings in the centre of the slab.
Pipe systems of each circuit must be completely erected before any of the cables are drawn-
in. The pipe run should be continuous throughout its length and kept straight as far as possible.
It should run either horizontally or vertically and never at an angle. The pipes are to be properly
tied with the re-bar @ 0.914 m (3’-0”) spacing using 18 SWG G.I. wire and pacers. If the pipes
are installed exposed in wall / over false ceiling these shall be placed over 3.175 mm (1/8”)
space-bar and clamped with saddle of M.S. Flat bar 25.5 mm x 3.18 mm (1” x 1/8”) @ 0.914
m (3-0”) spacing using rope-plug / rowel bolt as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge at no
extra cost to the Owner.
Page 152 of 194

During the laying of Conduit / G.I. pipe 2 Nos., G.I. wires of 12 SWG shall be installed inside the
Conduit/G.I. pipe although the length of Conduit / G.I. pipe run. The ends of the pull wires must
have sufficient length to facilitate pulling of cables and must terminate in the Switch Board,
Junction Box, Circular Box or any other outlet of the conduits/pipes. The cost of pull wires and
their installation shall be deemed to be included in the rates of the conduit / pipe work.
As pipe runs should be kept clear of gas, air and steam pipes, and pipes of other services. To
avoid other services pipes, the pipe should be either rerouted or set out so that at least 76.2
mm (3”) separation is maintained between other pipes and electrical pipes. Conditions other
than these stated above, if encountered by Contract or must be brought to the notice of the
Consultant/Engineer-in-Charge for instructions.
Pipes installed in wall shall be placed at the time of construction of the wall. No cutting in wall
shall be allowed without prior approval.
ii. Conduit / G.I. Pipe Bends
Whenever possible, instead of using bends, the conduit should be bent to the required angle
using Pipe Bender. The minimum bending radius shall be such as to allow compliance with
Act. 3.02 of this specification for bends in cables and in addition the internal radius of bends
shall not be less than 2½” times the outside diameter of the conduit. PVC pipes shall be
bent either by using a pipe bender or by using a hot-box bender or by using a flame. The bend
must be well formed & be without reduction in internal diameter.
The recommended bending radii are given below :
Dia of Conduit Radius of Bends

in mm in mm
¾” 19.05 5 127
1 25.40 6 152.4
1¼” 31.75 8 203.3
1½” 38.10 9 228.6
2 58.80 10½” 266.7
2½” 63.50 12 304.8
3” 76.20 14½” 368.3
If the situation warrants use of separate bends, for the PVC conduit such bends shall be made
of PVC fibre or other insulating materials. No inspection bents shall be used and at place were
inspection is required, steel boxes must be used.
Separate bends shall be used only after obtaining expressed approval of the Engineer-in-Charge
/ Consultant.
In case of G.I. pipes, long radius preformed bend of same material and of required angle (22
½”, 45”, 60” & 90”) shall be used G.I. pipe may be bent to required angle only after obtaining
expressed approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
iii. Conduit Termination and Fittings
At the of a run, the Conduit / G.I. pipe must terminate in a metal box galvanized or black
enameled. When a conduit is terminated in a metal box (except circular boxes) a smooth bore
Page 153 of 194

brass / PVC bush or ring bush must be used along with a brass lock-nuts of the following
specification
Conduit Size Lock Nut

Thickness Outer Dia No of
in mm in mm in mm Treads
¾” 19.05 1 – 1/16” 26.99 1 – 1/8” 28.57 3
1 25.40 1 – 3/16” 30.16 1 – ¼” 31.75 3
Conduit Size BUSH

CD Length No.of Length Bore
Threads at End
in mm in mm in mm in mm
¾” 19.05 7/8” 22.23 11/32” 8.73 4 5/64” 1.98
1” 25.04 1 – 1/8” 28.58 27/64 10.72 5 7/64” 2.78
iv. Conduit / G.I. Pipe in Floor
All conduits / G.I. pipes shall be installed having a slope of 1,1000 towards the floor mounted
pull box or cable duct so that condensate or leakage water drains out easily to the pull box or
cable duct. For runs of more than one conduit in the same floor the direction of slope of
different conduits should be decided in such systematic manner as to ensure an uniform drain
out of the leakage. All socket joints shall be made water tight. No U-bend in floor shall be
installed.
Measurement of payment shall be in linear meter of pipe / conduit in place for vertical and horizontal
runs as measured from the ‘As built’ drawing. Junction boxes, Pull boxes and any other boxes
including their covers shall be deemed to be included with the rate of pipes. No measurements hall
be made for Junction boxes. Pull boxes including their covers, unless such boxes appears as a
separate item in the Schedule.
4.8. CABLE RACE WAY
The work under this item consists of supply and installation of sheet steel made cable race way to
be concealed in the brick wall or hanged from the ceiling at the location shown in the drawing.
The race way shall be fabricated form 18SWG sheet steel with internal supports. The section must
be true to the drawing without sharp edges. The cover shall be fabricated form same material and
screw fitted with neat finishing so that no dust can accumulate upon the surface.
The race shall be installation concealed in the brick wall 1’-0” above the floor level. It is advisable to
fix the race way during construction of birck wall to avoid future chiseling.
Page 154 of 194

4.9. CABLE WORK
4.9.1. MATERIALS
i. Single Core Cable and Conductors
Single core low voltage cables and conductors shall be as per B.S. 6004 (1975) of as per VDE
0271 specifications of copper conductor, and PVC insulated conduct ors shall have 600/1000 volt
grade of PVC insulation. All sizes over 2.5 mm2 shall be standard.
All flexible cable shall be as per B.S 6004 (1975) unless otherwise specified.
ii. Multicore Cables
Multicore low voltage cable shall be bold PVC insulated & PVC sheathed non-armored direct burial
type, termite proof, made and tested according to VDE 0271/3.69 for this type of installation, rated
voltage being 600/1000 V.
Multicore high voltage cables shall be PVC insulated, field limiting conducting layers over each
individual conductor & core, copper shield also over each individual core. PVC inner sheath over
common covering of cores, flat steel wire armoring, helical steel taping & PVC outer sheath direct
burial type, termite proof, made & tested according to VDE 0271/3.69 for this type of installation,
rated voltage being 7000/12000 volts.
iii. Telephone Cables
i. Subscriber Cables
The subscriber cables shall be suitable for each laying and shall be made according (polyethylene)
insulated and laminated PE sheathed, Star-quad formation basic unit stranding and core wrapping.
The cables shall be tested (at 20o C) for voltage not less than 500 V (rms) wire to wire and 2000
V (rms) wire to shield with operating voltage of 150 V (rms), shall have minimum insulation
resistance (tested with mm 100 V.D.C.) of 500 M ohm-Km and mutual capacitance of not more than
50 nF/km (for 0.6 mm2) / 50 nF km (for 0.8 mm2)
ii. Insulation Cables

The insulation cables shall be suitable for exposed or concealed installation of 0.6 mm2 copper
conductors, with PVC insulation and PVC sheathed star-quad formation, basic unit stranding, and
core wrapping. The cable shall be tested (at 20o C) for voltage of 200 volts (mms), shall have
minimum insulation resistance (tested with min. 100 D.C) of 100 M ohm/km, and mutual capacitance
of not more than 130 nF/km (at 800 Hz).
4.9.2. INSTALLATION
i. Cable in Conduits
Generally, single core cable (non-sheathed) are to be installed in PVC conduits. The conduit sizes
shall be as specified in the drawing. It must be ensured that cables are not scratched/damaged
during pulling. For long lengths, pull boxes must be used even if not shown/indicated in the drawings.
Cable shall not be drawn round more than two 90 bends (or their equivalent) between drawing-in-
boxes, and any single bend must not be less than 90o.
Page 155 of 194

ii. Cable Bending Radii

The internal radius of every bend in a cable shall be not less than the appropriate value stated below:
Factor to be applied to
overall diameter of cable
Insulation Finish Overall to determine minimum
diameter internal radius of bend
Rubber or PVC Non-armored i) Not exceeding 10mm² 3
ii) Exceeding 10mm² but 4
not exceeding 25mm²
iii) Exceeding 25mm² 6
Armored Any 6
PVC (solid Non- Armored or
standard aluminium non-armored Any 8
or shaped copper
conductors)
iii. Cable Termination and Joints

The cables upto 2.5 mm2 size shall be solid conductor and therefore, jointing of these cables are
to be done through porcelain/plastic connector and the connector shall be wound with PIB tape before
placing in the box. Termination of cable up to 2.5 mm2. shall be done by making a hook at the end,
and for higher sizes, brass cable terminals must be used. Tee-off joint in the cable to lighting point,
switches, etc. shall not be made Looping in system of wiring is to be followed and the joints are to
be made in the switch boards only. All 3-4 core PVC cables shall be terminated using brass glands
of proper size.
iv. Connection of Switches

The phase wire should be connected to the switches and the neutral wire is to be kept solid in all
switch connections.
v. Cable Colour
All cables used must have colour as stated below :
 Two Wire Single Phase A.C. System

Red, Yellow or Blue for phase line or switch wire. Black for neutral line, Green for
earthling, when flexible cords are used
 Three Wire Two Phase A.C. System

Red for one phase
Black for common return
Yellow for other phase
 Three of Four Wire Three Phase A.C. System

Red for first phase
Yellow for second phase
Blue for third phase
Black for neutral
 Two Wire D.C. System

Red for positive or switch wire
Black for negative
Page 156 of 194

 For two wire final sub-circuits
Whether A.C. or D.C. supply lighting fan or power circuit, the neutral or middle wire
shall always be black, and the phase or outlet wire (no matter, which phase it is
connected to) shall always be red. The red wire shall always feed the switch, and the
same were shall always be used from the switch to the light, fan of power outlet.
vi. Construction Joint Crossing

At construction joint crossing, and expansion joint fitting as per drawing is to be installed and the
cables are to be run through such fittings.
vii. Earth Cable Trench

The size of the trench shall be of minimum 2’-9” depth and 1’-6” width for each cable to be laid,
where more than one cable is to be laid in the trench, the width of the trench is to be increased by 6”
for each extra cable for size below 70 mm2 (4 core) & 12” for bigger size cable.
A cushion of sand (F.M. 1.5) of 6” thick is to be placed over the bed of the trench over which the
cables are to be laid.
After laying the cable, first class brick on edge of flat are to be placed as separators in between the
cables. After installation of the brick separators, sand filling is to be done up to 6” from the top of
the bigger cable. After sand filling, two layers of first class brick flats are to be placed along the
length and breadth of the trench as a protection against injury and indication that a power cable is
laid. The rest of the trench shall be filled with earth, watered and rammed at 6” layers. After cables
are laid the original ground conditions shall be restored. But if brick pavement drain concrete road
or bituminous carpeted road are cut across or damaged, they shall be remedied and restored to the
original specification.
viii. Concrete Cable Trench

Trench for running cables shall be made of concrete (1:2:4) base and first class brick walls (1:4)
with inside plastering (1:4) including neat cement finishing. Trench shall be constructed with a slope
of about 1” in 50’-0” starting from some midpoint of the trench for disposal of sewage, if any, at
out side the building including taking proper care for final disposal of the sewage. Specification for
materials and construction for trench shall be the same as provided for similar works in the
specifications of civil works under this contract.
Trench shall have cover with slip resisting checkered steel plates of min ½” thickness and non-
corrosive surface. Cover plates shall be of stiffened type to have sufficient strength to take care of
vehicle load. Cover plates shall be placed in such a way that those can easily be opened and surface
level remains in the same plane of the floor having smooth finishing.
ix. Cable Laying

The cable route shall be as direct as possible and shall receive the Consultant’s / Engineer-in-
Charge’s approval before excavation.
All cable bends shall have a radius of not less than 2 time the diameter of the cable drum, or 20
times the diameter of the cable whichever is greater.
G.I. Pipes shall be provided for all road and drain crossing. These pipes shall be laid direct in the
ground without any sand bed sand layer, brick or cable covers.
Page 157 of 194

Cables shall always be laid out or laid into the ground through G.I. pipe of suitable size as decided
by the Consultant / Engineer-in-Charge. The length of the pipes over the ground shall not be less
than 4’-0”. No extra payment shall be paid for such pipes. The exposed end of the pipes shall be
sealed using PVC or wooden plugs.
The Contractor shall exercise great care in handling the cable and avoid forming “KINKS”. The cable
drums shall preferably be conveyed on wheeled cable-drum carried and unrolled and laid directly
from the drum carrier. Carriage by trailer or trucks can be allowed only if proper care is taken during
unloading the drums. and unrolling is done after placing the drum on drum-jacks and spindle. The
cable shall be unrolled in the directions indicated on the drum by the manufacturer.
G.I. Cable marker is to be installed at every point of the trench.
After the cable is laid, it shall be tested by the Contractor in presence of the Consultant / Engineer-
in-Charge. If the test is unsatisfactory, the cost of all repairs and replacement shall be borne by the
Contractor.
All surplus earth shall be removed to the indicated places by the Contractor at his own cost. No
extra charges shall be allowed for this work.
Any damage done to any other services by the Contractor for cable laying operations, shall be made
good by the Contractor.
All chasings and passages necessary fior laying of cables indoor shall be done by the Contractor
and the same shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Consultant/Engineer-in-Charge by the
Contractor without any extra charge to the Owner.
When trenches are left open overnight, and where road is to be cut the Contractor shall exhibit
suitable danger signal such as banners, red flags and red lamps at his own cost. Temporary
arrangement by placing wooden sleepers/sheet steel, etc. across the road cutting for vehicular traffic
are also to be made by the Contractor at no extra cost. The contractor shall be wholly responsible
for any accident which may occur due to the negligence of the Contractor.
No trench shall be dug until all cables meant for laying hve been procured and brought at site store.
Cost of any centering or shuttering and shoring of trench require to be done shall be borne by the
Contractor.
x. Regulations
Relevant requirements of IEE Regulations, e.g. those stated under 'defined conditions', and the VDE
shall be applied for cable installation work. For cables in Air the following, shall apply :
a) Ambient air temperature = 35°C.
b) One single core d.c. cable installed separately free in air, or, one Multicore cable installed
separately free in air, or, one three phase system, comprising three single core cables, installed
separately free in air in flat formation with a clearance of one diameter be wear individual single core
cables or in trefoil formation each individual single-core cables being in touch with each other.
c) One single core d.c. cable, one multicore cable or one three phase system of three single sore
cables installed free in air with minimum clearance of :
i) 2 cm from floor, wall or roof of the room,
Page 158 of 194

ii) Twice the cable diameter between two cables and four times the cable diameter
between two systems.
iii) 30 cm vertically between layers installed one above the other.
d) Cable is protected against radiation of heat from sun or any other source.
For cables in ground the following shall apply :
a. One single core d.c. cable installed separately, or, one multicore cable installed separately, or, three
single core cables in three phase system installed in flat formation with clearance of 7 cm, or in trefoil
formation, touching each other.
b. The cable way is through pipe of length not more than 6 meters.
xi. Insulation Test
Insulation test of the whole installation shall be carried out using 500 V Mugger, in presence of
authorized representative of the Owner, and result submit to Consultant / Engineer-in-Charge for
approval.
xii. Cable Tray
The cable tray shall be installed in accordance with the applicable layout drawings.
The location of tray in drawing shall be considered as approximate and it shall be incumbent upon
the Contractor before installation of tray to study all pertinent drawings and obtain precise information
from the architectural schedule, scale drawings, large scale and full size details of finished and
approved shop drawings of other trades. Trays incorrectly located be properly located at the
Contractor’s expenses.
Measurement for payment shall be in linear meter of cables, cable trays & trenches in place for
vertical and horizontal run as applicable. The lengths shall be rounded to nearest meter and
calculated from the ‘As built’ drawings.
The quantity of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the
contract price, per meter, which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all
materials, equipment, and labour, providing all incidental and consumable necessary to complete
this item of work including the installation test.
4.10. EARTH CONTINUITY CONDUCTORS
4.10.1. MATERIALS
These shall be electrolytic annealed copper/insulated copper conductor of 100% conductivity at

20°.C (68° F) (International/Annealed copper stranded) with weight resistively of 0.15328 ohm-
grm/m² at 20°.C (68° F) and density of 0.32117 Ib/m³, for meeting the requirement of BS 6360:1969
or its metric adoption.
The earth continuity conductor and earthing lead shall be run in accordance with the drawings and
direction, and all metal fittings shall be earthed with continuity conductors. All the earth continuity
Page 159 of 194

conductor from the various circuits, sockets, etc. shall be connected to the earthing block located
near the DB/SDB. Sizes of earth continuity conductors shall be as stated in the drawings. All
DB/SDB/SB shall be interconnected with earth continuity conductor. The earth continuity conductor
shall be allowed from earthing block to the respective earth point. Light and fan points, expect where
indicated otherwise, shall not be earth.
The earth continuity conductor and earthing lead shall be run in accordance with the drawings and
direction, and all metal fittings shall be earthed with continuity conductors. All the earth continuity
conductors from the various circuits, switch boards, sockets, etc. shall be connected to the earthing
block located in the DB/EDB/SDB/ESDB shall be inter connected with earth continuity conductor. The
earth continuity conductor shall be drawn along with the cables and no joint shall be allowed from
earthing block to the respective earth point. Light and fan points, except where indicated otherwise
shall not be earthed.
4.10.3. METHOD OFMEASUREMENT
Measurement for payment shall be made by linear meter of earth continuity conductor in place for
vertical and horizontal run. The lengths shall be rounded to nearest meter and measured from the
‘As built’ drawings.
The quantity of completed and accepted works measured as provided above shall be paid for at the
contract unit price, per meter, which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all
materials, labour, tools and installation including termination of copper wire and all accessories,
consumable and incidentals necessary to complete this item of work including installation test
4.11. SOCKET OUTLETS
The work under this item shall consist of supply and installation of concealed type sockets as per
schedule and these sockets specifications at location shown on the drawing.
The sockets outlets shall comply with BS546: 1950 or equivalent. Three pin sockets these shall be
switched and un-shuttered moulded type for flush mounting and shall be suitable for three pin plugs.
The size shall be 83mm X 83mm and the colour of the plate shall be ivory white. These shall be
supplied with countersunk cadmium plated fixing screws and mounted in hammer painted steel sheet
box having earth point. Sockets shall be for 250V A.C.
The fixing of the units on the outlets boxes shall be by means of flat hear galvanized screws. The flat
head of the screw shall be sunk in the plates so as to finish flush with the surface of the cover. The
mounting heights of the outlets shall be as shown on the drawings. The earth wire shall be connected
to earth point of the boxes and to the 3rd pole of the 3 pin of the socket.
The socket shall be installed on wall with lower end of the face plates at skirt level or as directed by
the Engineer if not specified otherwise, and at locations shown in applicable layout drawing
Page 160 of 194

4.12. TELEPHONE SYSTEM
4.12.1. MATERIALS
i. PVC Conduit
Same as Art 4.7.1(i)
ii. G. I. Pipe
Same as Art. 4.7.1(ii) Appropriate samples shall be submitted prior to the installation of Conduit/G.I.
Pipe.
iii. Telephone Pull Box, Junction Box etc.

The item consists of supplying and installation of telephone junction box at the location shown on
the drawing.
The box shall be totally insulated and made of polstrol/ polycarbonate the boxes shall be type tested
assemblies (TTA) conforming to IEC439-1 & 2shall have ISO9001 certifications.
The telephone junction box shall be installed either surface/concealed as per direction of the Engineer-
in-charge.
The telephone grommet shall be foreign made MK type or equivalent as per schedule and shall
comply with the relevant requirements of applicable DIN (German Standard).
iv. Telephone Cable
Telephone Cable shall be PVC insulated and PVC insulated PVC sheathed copper conductor type
JYY=0.6 Bd. St (Bangladesh Cable Shilpa).
v. Telephone Outlet :
The work under this item consist of supply and installation of telephone outlets at locations shown in
the plains.
Telephone outlet consists of 16SWG sheet steel box.
The steel shall be anti-dust truanted grey hammer painted. All screws to be used shall be cadmium
plated. The covers shall have central knock-out for telephone connecting wire entry.
The boxes shall be placed in position during construction of the wall to avoid chasing in wall at a later
date. PVC bush shall be used for connecting the PVC pipe with the M.S. Box.
i. PVC Conduit / G.I. Pipe etc.
In general, Conduit & G.I. pipe shall be installed as per Art. 4.7.02
Where PVC conduit uses fittings made of 16 SWG sheet steel or other materials, these shall be
thread fitted and then sealed with metal solvent cement.
All PVC conduits / G.I. pipes run shall be upto a height of 7 or as shown in the drawing from the
floor and shall be protected by a metal enclosure.
Page 161 of 194

PVC conduit/pipes shall be bent either by using a pipe bender as detailed in Art.4.7.2b (ii). In any
event, the bending radius shall conform to relevant portion of Art.4.7.2b (ii) and the bend must be
well-formed and be without reduction in internal diameter.
ii. Telephone Pull Boxes, Distribution Boxes, Junction Boxes etc.
The pull boxes, distribution boxes and junction boxes shall be installed flush in wall/ column. The
boxes shall be placed in position during construction of the wall. Also relevant portions of Art. 3.01
(iii) shall apply.
iii. Telephone Grommet
i. The Telephone Grommet shall be installed on wall to accommodate lower end of the face plates
of grommet at a height of 152 mm/228 mm (6”/0”) from the floor i.e. at skirting level, if not
specified otherwise, and locations shown in applicable layout drawings.
ii. The fixing of the units on the outlet boxes shall be by means of flat head cadmium plated screws.
The flat head of the screw shall be sunk in the plates so as to finish flush with the surface of the
cover. The mounting heights of the outlets shall be as shown in the drawings.
iii. The location of Grommets shown on diagrammatic wiring plans shall be considered as approximate
and it shall be incumbent upon the Contractor, before installation of outlet boxes to study all
pertinent drawings and obtain precise information from architectural schedule, scale drawings,
large scale and full size details of finished rooms and approved shop drawings of other trades. It
shall be understood that outlet may be relocated of a distance of a not exceeding 4.57 m (15’-0”)
from the location shown on the drawings. In centering outlets, due allowance shall be made for
overhead piping ducts, window and door trim variation of thickness of furring plastering etc. as
erected regardless conditions which may be otherwise shown on small scale drawing. Outlets
incorrectly located shall be properly relocated of the Contractor’s expense.
Measurement for payment shall be unit of telephone grommet, pull/junction box and linear meter of
pipes and cables installed in place complete with M.S. Box cover accessories, fittings, consumable
etc.
The amount of complete and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the
contract unit price, per each/per Rm (as applicable) which payment shall constitute full compensation
for furnishing all materials, labour, tools and equipment and installing materials including telephone
grommet/PB/JB. M.S. Box and all other accessories, consumable and incidentals necessary to
complete this item of work. [The unit price shall also cover testing and commissioning of installation
and equipment]
4.13. LIGHT FITTINGS
4.13.1. MATERIALS
The light fitting shall be constructed as per schedule, and shall comply with the relevant requirements
of applicable B.S. including B.S. 4533.
Page 162 of 194

The chokes, if applicable, shall comply with the requirement of B.S. 2818, shall be Philip’s /
Seminar/GEC or of equivalent quality, and shall have appropriate power factor correction capacitor
(250 volt 3.5 f for 20 W and 40 W tubes, if used with Siemens/GEC chokes, for other chokes of
approved quality, the improved p.f. shall not be less than 0.890.
The starters shall be 91 W lamp type and shall have built-in radio interference suppressor capacitor.
Electronic ballast complying appropriate standard shall be used, if specifically mentioned elsewhere
or if directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
All incandescent light fittings, except where specifically stated otherwise, shall have un-switched
brass holders for BC 22/25 x 26 lamp caps complying with B.S. 52:1963 (1978).
Appropriate samples of light fittings with chokes and starters (if any) shall be submitted prior to
installations.
i. The light fittings shall be installed in accordance with the applicable fittings layout drawings.
ii. All pendent fittings shall be supported from brass ceiling base plate with at least 9.525 mm (3/8”)
screw-hub.
iii. The location of outlets shown on conduit layout and wiring plans shall be considered as approximate
and it shall be incumbent upon the contractor, before installation of outlet boxes, to study all pertinent
drawings and obtain precise information from the architectural schedules, scale drawings, large
scale and full size details of finished rooms and approved shop drawing of other trades. It shall be
understood that any outlet may become necessary to be relocated at a distance not exceeding 15
from the location shown on the drawings. In centering outlets due allowance shall be made for
overhead piping ducts, window and door trim, variation in thickness of furring plastering etc. as
erected, regardless of conditions which may be otherwise shown on small scale drawings. Outlets
incorrectly located shall be properly relocated at the Contractor’s expense.
Measurement for payment shall be made by units of lights installed in place. Each fitting complete
with all accessories and consumable shall be considered as one unit.
The quantity of completed and accepted work, measured above shall be paid for at contract unit
price, per unit number (each) which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all
labour, tools and materials including supply of consumable, accessories and incidentals necessary
to complete this item of work.
4.14. CEILING FAN / EXHAUST FAN
4.14.1. MATERIALS
i. Ceiling Fan
a. Fans:
Fans of approved quality shall be provided and shall be complete with suspension rod of required
length, canopy, speed regulators etc., speed regulators shall be electronic type with non-stop
Page 163 of 194

increasing/decreasing speed and off position. General requirements of the fans to be provided
are as follows :
Sweep 1400 mm 1200 mm

Air Delivery at full speed (CFM) 10,000 7,000
Speed (RPM) 270 300
Power Consumption (Watt) 65 50
Power factor 0.95 0.95
A.C. Power Supply (Volts) 220/240 220/240
Frequency (C/S) 50 50
b. Fan Clamps:
The Concealed fan clamps shall be made of at least 12.7 mm (1/2”) dia M.S. Rod as per
drawings. The ceiling rose shall be of molded plastic of approved quality.
c. Exhaust Fan :
Fans of approved quality\ shall be provided and shall be complete with steel frame louver, shutter
etc. General requirements of the fans to be provided are as follows :
Sweep 300 mm
Air Delivery (CFM) 670
Speed (RPM) 950
Power Consumption (Watt) 35
Power factor 0.95
A.C. Power Supply (Volts) 220/240
Frequency (C/S) 50
i. The ceiling fans shall be installed in accordance with the applicable fan layout drawings. If otherwise
not mentioned in the drawings and specifications, all fans shall be suspended at a height of 2.59 m
(8’-6”) from the finished floor level.
ii. Fan clamps shall be installed as detailed in the drawings. Circular box with ceiling rose for fan outlets,
shall be at the center of the clamps. The clamp shall be installed in such a manner that clamps,
ceiling rose, etc. shall be completely concealed by the fan canopy.
iii. The exhaust fans shall be installed in accordance with the applicable for layout drawings. If otherwise
not mentioned in the drawings and specifications, all fans shall be installed at a height of 2.13 m
(7.-0”) form the finished floor level or above lintel level as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
i. Measurement for payment shall be made by units of Fans/Exhaust fans installed in place. Each
fan/exhaust fan complete with all accessories and consumable shall be considered as one unit.
ii. Measurement for payment shall be made by units of clamps installed in place. Each fan clamp
complete with all accessories e.g. ceiling rose, etc. shall be considered as one unit of fan clamp.
The quantity of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for the
contract unit price, per each unit which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all
labour, tools and installation materials including fan regulators and all other consumable and
incidentals necessary to complete this item of work in all respect.
Page 164 of 194

4.15. DISTRIBUTION BOARDS/EMERGENCY DISTRIBUTION BOARDS/SUB-DISTRIBUTION

BOARDS/EMERGENCY SUB-DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
4.15.1. MATERIALS
i. Materials
The DB/EDB/SDB/ESDB shall be as per schedule and drawings shall be safely dead-front fixed type having
circuit breaker. The distribution boards shall have three phase energy meter, a meter and voltmeter with
phase selector switch (in case three phase meters are provided), on/off indication bulb etc. as shown
in the drawings or as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. The meters shall be installed in a separate
compartment in the distribution boards, and provision shall be made such that the meters can be read
directly without opening the front cover of the boards by providing glass/clear Perspex covering on the
meter opening or by installing the meter scales flushed with the door. Panels shall be designed for
operation on a 240/415 V. 50 Hz. 3 phase, 4 wire system. Breakers shall have inverse time tripping with
thermal magnetic trip elements. All circuit breakers shall be trip-free and shall be of the indicating type.
The panels shall have the phase clearly marked, and must have solid copper bus bar (TP and N ) of
appropriate ration and size. The panels shall be constructed as per schedule, and shall comply with
relevant requirements of applicable B.S. including B.S. 4649, where applicable, and would be painted
with two (2) coats of grey Duco to B.S. 38IC shade with standard concentric knockouts of required
sizes all around. The panels shall have directory frames and printed directory on/in side of door. The
door is to be provided with flush lock and handle. All doors are to be keyed alike. All hinges shall be
concealed.
ii. Each board shall have an earthing block of copper/brass 150 mm x 38 mm x 13 mm (6” x 1 ¼” x
½”) with 8 x 9.52 mm (8.3/8”) drilled holes and 8 x 3.18 mm (8 x 1/8”) machine screw tapped holes
for 24 t.p)
iii. The MCB/MCCB shall be quick make, quick-bread type, and shall have inverse-line limit
characteristics with instantaneous magnetic trip elements functioning on overloads above the normal
operating range. All circuit breakers shall be “trip-free”. Ratings and frame sizes of breakers shall
be in accordance with schedule. All lugs must be of the soldieries mechanical type. The Miniature
Circuit Breakers (MCB) must comply with B.S. 3871 : part 1 (1985) category M4 ( 5A-60A).
Rated voltage 240/415 V A.C. 50 Hz. interrupting capacity 4000 Amp. capable of providing overload
and short circuit protection through thermal and magnetic trip actions respectively, temperature rating
40oC. tropicalized (moisture, fungus, corrosion treated), with contracts of silver alloy. The MCCB
must comply with B.S. 3871 part 2 (1986). Rated voltage 600 V A.C. 50 Hz with overload and short
circuit protection with thermal and magnetic tripping action, interrupting capacity as indicated in the
schedule temperature rating 40o C, tropicalized (moisture, fungus, corrosion treated).
iv. The Interrupted capacity of circuit breaker shall be :
MCB - 10KA (1A to 63A)

ELCB - 100mA (32A to 100A)
MPCB - 16KA (0.16A to 32A)
MPCB - 30KA (25A to 40A)
MPCB - 35KA (40A to 200A)
MCCB - 25KA (40A-250A)
MCCB - 50KA (315A-1250A)
Page 165 of 194

i. The Board shall be installed in accordance with the instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge or as shown
in the applicable layout drawings. Minimum height to bottom of the Boards from the floor level shall
be 0.76 m (2’-6”) and maximum height of any circuit breaker/switch shall be 1.83 m (6’-0”) from
the same level, or as shown in the detail drawing.
ii. The location of DB/EDB/ESDB shown on layout drawings shall be considered as approximate and it
shall be incumbent upon the Contractor, before installation of DB/EDB/SDB/ESDB to study all
pertinent drawings and obtain precise information from the architectural scale drawings, large scale
and full size details of finished rooms and approved shop drawings of other trades. It shall be
understood that any DB/EDB/SDB/ESDB may be relocated at a distance not exceeding 15 ‘ from
the location shown on the drawings. In centering DB/EDB/SDB/ESDB due allowance shall be made
for overhead piping, ducts, window and door trim, variations in thickness of furring, plastering, etc.
as erected, regardless of conditions which may be otherwise shown on small drawings,
DB/EDB/SDB/ESDB incorrectly located shall be properly relocated at Contractor’s expenses.
Measurement for payment shall be by units of DB/EDB/SDB/ESDB installed in place completely wired and
connected to the circuits. Each DB/EDB/SDB/ESDB complete with all accessories and consumable, shall
be considered as one unit.
The amount of complete accepted work, measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract
unit price, per each which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labour, tools
materials such as DB/EDB/SDB/ESDB cubicle breaker, bus bar, equipment, and accessories fabricated
angle-iron platform, pipe supports, cable gland etc. and all other consumable and incidentals necessary
to complete this item of work in all respects.
4.16. METER BOARD
4.16.1. MATERIALS
All meters and circuit breakers are of ratings given in schedule shall be fixed in 14 SWG sheet steel box
with locking arrangement. The box must be hammer painted. The materials shall be submitted to the
Consultant/Engineer-in-Charge for approval before installation. The meter board shall be installed if only
meters are not provided in the LT distribution panels of the sub-station.
i. The meter board shall be installed in wall with lower end of the board at a height of 1.22 m (4-0”)
from the finished floor level or it will be installed as per Consultant/Engineer-in-Charge’s written
instruction. If not specified the board shall be installed at the location shown in the drawing.
ii. The boards shall be concealed and cover plates shall be flush to the finished surface of the wall.
Page 166 of 194

Measurement for payment shall be by units of boards installed in place. Each board complete with sheet
steel box, meter, MCCB/MCB and locking arrangement, any other accessories required to complete the
work shall be considered as one unit.
The amount of complete and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract
price, per set, which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labour, tools, materials,
installation of materials including meter MCCB/MCB, sheet steel box, all consumable and incidentals
necessary for storage, transportation to work site and to complete this item of work in all respects.
4.17. SWITCH BOARDS AND FAN REGULATOR BOARDS
4.17.1. MATERIALS
Switch boards and fan regulator boards shall be as per schedule and drawing and shall have rocker/piano
switches shall be vertical single pole (1-way / 2 –way) 5A A.C. architrave rocker/piano operated switches
white (or as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge) in colour, to B.S. 3676:1963, complying with the test
requirements for inductive, or resistive loads specified, and satisfy the best requirements of the circuits
up to the ratings of these switches, as set out in B.S. 3676 amendment 3:1969. The switches must
have a minimum clearance of 3 mm between the contracts, and a similar minimum creping distance. All
contacts shall be faced with pure silver/silver-cadmium oxide alloy. The switch operating member shall
pivot independently of the rocker, making the speed of ‘make’ and ‘break’ independent of the speed at
which the rocker is operated. Terminal capability minimum 2 x 2.5 mm2 conductors for each Appropriate
samples shall be submitted prior to installation of switches.
Each board shall have an earthing block of cooper/brass 50.8mm x 9.53 mm x 9.53 mm (2” x 3/8” x
3/8”) with 4 x 4.76 mm (4 x 3/16”) drilled holes and 4 x 1.59 mm (4 x 1/16”) machine screw tapped
hole for 24 t.p.i. The box of the switch/regulator boards shall be made of 16 SWG sheet steel and shall
be painted with three coats of approved anticorrosive grey paint. Box ears shall be adequate to
accommodate at least 14 SWG ground wires.
The switch boards and fan regulator boards shall be installed on wall at a height of 4’-0”, if not specified
otherwise, from the floor and at locations shown in applicable layout drawings. The regulators shall be
installed inside the box with regulator’s knob projected over the covering if not specified otherwise. The
phase wire shall be connected to the switches and the neutral wire shall be kept solid in all swith
connections. The Earth Continuity Conductor (ECC) shall be connected to the earth point inside the swith
board. The approved size steel boxes shall be installed at the time of construction of the wall to avoid
chasing in wall.
The location of boards shown on conduit layout and wiring plans shall be considered as approximate
and it shall be incumbent upon the Contractor, before installation of switch board/regulator board boxes
to study all pertinent drawings and obtain precise information from the architectural schedules, scale
drawings, large scale and full size details of finished rooms and approved shop drawings of other trades.
It shall be understood that any switch/regulator board may be relocated at a distance not exceeding 4.57
m (15’-0”) from the location shown on the drawing. In centering the boards due allowance shall be made
Page 167 of 194

for overhead piping, ducts, window and door trip, variations in thickness of furring, plastering, etc. as
erected, regardless of conditions which may be otherwise shown on shall scale drawing. Switch
boards/regulator boards incorrectly located shall be properly relocated at the Contractor’s expense.
Measurement for payment shall be units of switch boards and/or fan regulator boards in place. Each
switch board or regulator board with cover, switches, sheet steel box etc. shall be considered as one
unit.
The quantity of completed and accepted work measured as provided above, shall be paid for at contract
unit price, per each, which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, labour,
tools and equipment and installation materials including switch board/fan regulator board complete with
plate, switches, regulators and other accessories, consumable and incidentals necessary to complete
this item of work.
4.18. SOCKET / MCB / MCCB OUTLETS
4.18.1. MATERIALS
i. All socket outlets shall be MK type, white (or as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge) in colour,
conforming to B.S. 546:1950 (3 pins) and B.S. 372 part 1:1930 (2 pins). The socket tubes shall be
self-adjusting for pitch with a non-expanding size-limiting entry to protect the internal contacts from
distortion. All socket, switches (where applicable) shall have pure silver/silver-cadmium oxide alloy
contact in which contract pressure shall be permanently maintained by subsidiary helical
compression springs. All moldings shall be made of amino plastic urea molding powder to B.S.
1322 : 1956 or revised and shall possess high track resisting qualities. These shall be supplied
with countersunk cadmium plated fixing screws and mounted in 16 SWG hammer painted sheet box
having brass earth point as per drawing and direction.
ii. The controlled sockets of MCB/MCB, if applicable, shall be un-switched and the box shall have earth
point. For specifications of MCB/ MCCB, refer to Art. 4.15.1
iii. The lift indicator outlets shall be made of 16 SWG sheet steel hammer painted.
i. The socket/MCB/MCCB shall be installed on wall with lower end of the face plates at a height of
152.4 mm / 228.6 mm (6”/9”) from the floor i.e. at skirting level, if not specified otherwise, and
locations shown in applicable layout drawings.
ii. The controlled outlet (socket or black box) of MCB/MCCB shall be on wall with the lower end of the
face plates at a height of 152.4 mm (6”) above the upper edge of the lintel, if not specified otherwise.
iii. The fixing of the units on the outlet boxes shall be by means of flat head cadmium plated screws.
The flat head of the screw shall be sunk in the plates so as to finish flush with the surface of the
cover. The earth wire shall be connected to earth point of the boxes to the 3rd pole of the 3 pin
sockets, 2 pin socket outlets on switch boards are for light loads only.
iv. Conditions set out in Art. 4.15.02 shall also apply.
Page 168 of 194

Measurement for payment shall be by units of sockets/MCB/MCBB indicator outlets installed in place.
Each socket/MCB/indicator outlet complete with sheet steel box, socket, controlling MCB/MCCB, cover,
etc. (where applicable) shall be considered as one unit.
The quantity of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the
contract price, per each, which payment shall constitute full compensation all labour, tools, materials
installation materials including socket/MCB/MCCB outlets, sheet steel box, covers all consumable and
incidentals necessary to complete this item of work.
4.19. DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM EARTHING
4.19.1. MATERIALS
i. Earth Electrode
a) Pipe Electrode (Where Applicable)
This earth electrode shall be 38mm (1½”) dia minimum 12 m (40’-0”) long G.I. pipe with two 3.17
(1/8”) dia holes across the pipe diameter at every 1.22 m (4’-0”) length of the pipe.
b) Pipe Electrode (Where Applicable)

This earth electrode shall be cold rolled single/double copper plate 600 mm x 600 x 13 mm (2’-0” x 2’-
0” x ½”) having provision for connecting the earthing lead as shown in the drawing and as per schedule.
ii. Earthing Lead

a) Earthing lead shall consist of copper conductor of 2 x 1/0 SWG as per specification given in Art.
4.01 all terminal lugs shall be of copper & nut-bolts of brass.
b) Conductors for interconnection between the electrodes in any group & between groups shall have
twin conductors with a combined rating of 20 KA for 3 seconds.
Earthing conductors shall be of annealed high conductivity copper and shall be stranded in
accordance with IEC 228 Table-VII Class-2. They shall be protected with an extruded PVC sheath of
1000 volts grade.
iii. Earthing Block
The earthing block shall be of solid electrolytic copper, cast and machined of size as per schedule,
having at least 15 Nos. 6.35 mm (1/4” dia) drilled holes for accommodating the terminal of the
Earth continuity conductor. Requisite number of brass nuts and bolts shall also be provided.
iv. Earth Inspection Pit (if necessary)
Bricks used shall be of 1st class. Only approved quality cement shall be used. For R.C.C. cover
12.7 mm (1/2”) rods @ 150 mm (6”) c/c with two 9.53 mm (3/8”) M.S. hook of 50.8 mm (2”
diameter) shall be provided in the cover slab.
i. Earth Electrode
a) Pipe Electrode
The pipe earth electrode shall be buried below ground level, as per schedule, by tube-well sinking method.
The earthing lead from the distribution board to the main earth electrode shall be installed in G.I. pipe of
specified diameter. The terminal connected to the earth electrode shall use a brass clamp. After making
the connection, the clamp shall be covered with bitumen poured hot, and covered with jute cloth.
Page 169 of 194

b) Plate Electrode
The plate earth electrode (if applicable) shall be buried below ground level as per schedule and installed
in an upright position and completely surrounded by a bed of at least one foot of charcoal mixed with
sodium chloride salt, lime and packed hard as per drawing. Distance between any two earth electrodes
shall be at least 7.62 m (25-0”).
ii. Earthing Leads
The earthing lead from the earth electrode shall be connected to the earthing block near
DB/EDB/SDB/ESDB. A double run of specified copper conductor shall be brought out as earthing lead
for the earth electrode through G.I. pipe from the electrode and connected to the earth blocks. There
shall be no joint in the copper earthing lead. All earthing lead shall follow the shortest and most direct
route to earth electrode and sharp bends and joints shall be avoided. The earthing leads shall be
connected to the earth electrode as per drawings. The joints shall be made mechanically strong and
electrically continuous with minimum of resistance.
iii. Earth Inspection Pit (if necessary)
The earth inspection pit shall be constructed as per schedule and direction of the Consultant/Engineer-in-
Charge. The slab shall have level surface and the pit shall have well formed regular sides.
iv. Maximum Earth Loop Resistance
The maximum eartth loop resistance from any point in the installation including earthing lead to the earth
electrode shall not exceed the resistance of one ohm or specified in the schedule, or that indicated by
the Consultant/Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor must ensure that the leads are efficiently bonded to
all metal works other than the current carrying part, so that the above resistance level is not exceeded it
will be the duty of the Contractor to provide earth tester, test the installation in presence of the authorized
representative of the Owner and submit earth test report to the Consultant/Owner for approval.
i. Earth Electrode
Measurement for payment shall be per set / per each (as applicable) of earth electrode(s) installed in
place as described in the schedule and as shown in the drawing.
ii. Earthing Lead
Measurement for payment shall be made by linear meter of earthing lead installed in place including
necessary pipes, terminal lugs, nuts, bolts, etc. as described in the schedule and showing the drawing.
iii. Earthing Block
Measurement for payment shall be made by units of earth block installed in place complete with all
accessories, connections, consumable etc. as described in the schedule and as shown in the drawing.
iv. Earth Inspection Pit
Page 170 of 194

Measurement for payment shall be per unit of earth inspection pit installed in place or as described in the
schedule and as shown in the drawing.
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at contract
unit price, “per unit” ‘per set / Rm’ (as applicable) which payment shall constitute full compensation
for furnishing all materials, labour tools, equipment and materials including supply of all accessories,
consumable and incidental necessary to complete this item of work including carrying out the necessary
test, commissioning.
4.20. LIGHTNING PROTECTON SYSTEM
4.20.1. MATERIALS
i. Air Terminals
Air terminal shall be of copper of grade required for commercial electrical works, generally designate as
being of minimum 98 percent conductivity when annealed. The size and shape of the air terminal shall
be as per detail drawings and schedule.
ii. Roof and Intermediate Conductor
Roof conductor and intermediate conductor shall be made of copper as detailed in (i) above and of size
as indicated in the detail drawing and schedule.
iii. Down Conductor
Same as item (ii) above.
iv. Test Point
The test point shall be made as per schedule and detail drawing. The bus bar assembly shall be well-
formed and shall be without fitting. The conductor terminals shall be provided with copper lugs of size
as detailed in the schedule and drawing.
v. Earth Inspection Pit
Earth inspection pit shall be made as per schedule and detail drawings. Bricks used shall be 1st class.
For R.C.C. cover 12.7 mm (1/2”) dia rods @ 152 (6”) c/c with two 9.5 mm (3/8”) dia. M.S. hook of
50.8 mm (2”) diameter shall be provided in the cover slab.
vi. Earth Electrode
Earth electrode shall be cold rolled single copper plate of size 600 mm x 600 mm x 13 mm (2’-0” x 2’0”
x ½”) as per drawings and specification having provision for connection the earthing load.
vii. Earth Lead
Earthing lead shall consists of copper conductor to 1/10 SWG as per specification given in Art. 4.01.
All terminal lugs shall be of copper and nut bolts of brass.
Page 171 of 194

4.20.2. INSTALLATIONS
Lighting protection system shall be supplied and installed as per relevant IEC standard and CP 326. Under
no circumstances lighting protection network will be connected to sub-station earthing network of
distribution system earthing net work. Minimum distance of separation from one earth electrode of
lighting protection system to another shall be 7 meter (23’-0”).
i. Air Terminals
Air terminals shall be clamped with the building, as pr detail drawing and in a manner that there is no
possibility of over turning. An air terminal shall be fixed with copper/bronze metal base by means of
brass bolts, nuts and washer etc. All air terminals shall be interconnected by means of roof conductor.
Subsequently the entire air terminals shall be connected to the earth electrode through down conductors.
The supporting base for air terminal shall be of extra heavy duty copper/bronze with arrangements for
fixing to the RCC column, the sockets having female thread for fixing the air terminal and with clamp type
fasteners to suit the sizes of the horizontal & down conductors.
ii. Roof and Intermediate Conductor
Roof and Intermediate Conductors shall be continuous and without any joint between termination. All
terminations shall be permanent, both electrically and mechanically. Where joints in a conductor is
absolutely unavoidable, it shall be made after expressed comment of the Consultant/Engineer-in-Charge,
shall be mechanically strong and well made and provide adequate electrical conductivity, which shall be
sectional area of the conductors.
No bend in the conductor shall have radius of less than 203 mm (8”) and the angle of any turn shall not
be less than 90o. All conductor runs shall preserve a downward or horizontal course.
The conductor shall be securely attached to the building by means of fasteners at intervals not exceeding
50.8 mm (2’-0”), shall be embedded under roof finish or concealed in plaster. Fasteners shall have
cross-section not less than 14 SWG be made of brass or copper.
Appropriate sample of conductor and fastener shall be submitted prior to installation of roof
Conductor.
iii. Down Conductor
The down conductor shall be continuous and shall be installed as indicated in the schedule.
These shall be securely installed from the roof the roof top to the plinth level of the Building by two screw
masonry fastener.
Also appropriate portions of Article 12.02 (ii) shall apply.
iv. Joints
Joints in the entire system shall be avoided as far as possible. However, any joint found necessary shall
be made with approved type and size of heavy duty jointing clamps of bronze, brass/copper. All joint and
bends of the conductors shall be mechanically effective, i.e. clamped, screwed, bolted, crimped, rivetted
of welded, with over lapping points, the length of the overlap being not less than 25 mm (1”) and shall
be electrically continuous.
Page 172 of 194

v. Test Point
Each down conductor shall be provided with a test point (M.S. Box made of 16 SWG sheet steel) and
earth termination in accordance with the drawings, installed at a height specified in the drawing or as per
the direct ion of the Enginer-in-Charge.
The tet point shall be installed during construction of the building wall, and made flush with the outside
wall finish.
Copper lugs shall be press-fitted with the conductor terminals with crimping tools, or shall be brazed, or
shall use cast brass lug-hook. The lug shall be bolted with the bus bar by means of brass nuts and bolts.
vi. Earth Terminals
Earth terminals shall be bare copper standard wire and shall connect the test point at the end of the down
conductor directly to the earth electrode without any joints.
vii. Earth Inspection Pit (if necessary)
The earth inspection pit shall be constructed as per schedule and direction. The slab shall have level
surface and the pit shall have well-formed regular sides.
viii. Earth Electrode
Plate Electrode : The plate earth electrode shall be buried as per drawing and details and specification.
The earthing lead from the test point to the main earth electrode shall be installed in G.I. pipe of specified
diameter. The terminal connected to the earth electrode shall use a brass clamp. After making the
connection, the clamp shall be covered with bitumen poured hot and covered with jute cloth.
ix. Earthing Leads
The earthing leads from the earth electrode shall be connected to the eartihing block in the test point. A
double run of specified copper conductor shall be brought out from the electrode (to be connected in a
ring if required) and connected to the earth block. There shall be no joints in the copper earthing lead.
All earthing lead shall follow the shortest and most direct route to earth electrode and sharp bends and
joints shall be avoided. The earthing leads shall be connected to the earth electrode as per drawings.
The joints shall be made, mechanically strong and electrically continuous with minimum resistance.
x. Maximum Earth Loop Resistance
The maximum earth loop resistance from any point in the installation including earthing lead to the earth
electrode shall not exceed one ohm resistance specified indicated by the Consultant/Engineer-in-Charge.
The Contractor must ensure that leads are efficiently bonded with all metal works other than the current
carrying parts so that the above resistance level is not exceeded. It will be the duty of the Contractor to
provide Earth Tester to test the installation in presence of the authorised representative of the Owner and
submit Earth Test Report to the Consultant/Owner for approval. Method of Measurements
i. Air Terminal
Page 173 of 194

Measurement for payment shall be per each air terminal installed in place. One air terminal including its
base plate, bolts, washers, consumable etc. to complete the work in all respect, shall be considered as
one unit.
ii. Down and Intermediate Conductor
Measurement for payment shall be made by linear meter of conductor installed in place including pipe,
terminal lugs, nut bolts etc. to complete the work in all respect.
iii. Roof Conductor
Measurement for payment shall be made by linear meter of roof conductor installed in place including
necessary fasteners, terminal lugs, nuts, bolts, etc. to complete in the work in all respect.
iv. Test Point
Measurement for payment shall be made per each test point installed in place to complete the work in all
respect.
v. Earth Inspection Pit
Measurement for payment shall be made per each. Each Inspection Pit constructed in place, which shall
include all material, labour, consumable, incidentals etc.
vi. Earth Electrode
Measurement for payment shall be per set of earth electrode installed in place to complete the work in all
respect.
vii. Earthing Lead
Measurement for payment shall be made by linear meter of earthing lead installed in place including pipe
of earthing terminal lugs, nuts, bolts, etc. to complete the work in all respect.
The quantity of complete and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract
price per each/set/meter (as applicable) which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing
all labour, tools, equipment, materials including supply of all accessories, consumable and incidentals
necessary for storage, transportation to work site and to complete this item of work in all respect.
4.21. PABX SYSTEM
Supply, Installation & Commissioning of Digital PABX (Made in Germany/ Japan/ UK/ U.S.A.). PABX will
be set-up for BGMEA complex at Panthapath link road, Dhaka., T&T Line 10 (Ten) extendable to 40 (Forty)
& Internal Line 100 extendable to 600 or more, including MDF box, Auto attendant, voice mail as per
requirement, 100% Non-blocking upto its maximum capacity and free port system. It must be brand new
and unused, old model will not be acceptable, Model number must be specified (with country) and
supported by catalogue and technical papers etc. by bidder. It can run by 220v AC/240v AC.,50
Hz,(Internal), power failure must have integrated UPS Capable to run the PABX at least 1(one) hour.
Page 174 of 194

Integrated with main unit PCM time division multiplex, Stored program control system, Multi-pair cable
as needed for connection from PABX to operator console and auto attendant console should be included.
Necessary software should be installed in the site and programming should be instructed to the user.
Must be compatible with Attendant console with busy lamp field, Auto attendant and voice mail, Mobile-
interface, Cordless telephone, Fax, Executive and normal telephone set. Must have Automatic call
distribution, Call forwarding, Background music, Calling Proof, Conference facility, Security code, Call
monitoring, Call accounting, Auto hunting, Call restriction by ID number, Executive override. Incoming call
handle by operator, the PABX will be connected to one attendant console to attend the call centrally for
incoming/outgoing and intercom call. The operator should be able to connect the outgoing calls centrally
as per requirement. Attendant console should be able to collect the system trouble information’s and also
station status. Attendant console should be composed with key set and user can originate station call
and observe station status. The operator console will be used for normal operation and maintenance and
for the purpose of training or monitoring. It has the provision for both hand set and head set, An
EBY/TBY(Extension/Trunk busy lamp field) should be interfaced with operator console so that it will give
200 lines extension/Trunk status information. Catalogues should be attached & Model Number and
Technical specification should be c1early specified.
It has the provision so that a caller can be connected to the desired station without help of the operator.
It has completely voice guided path that will guide the incoming caller to land his call in desired
destination. The system has to able to announce the different status of station/operator (Busy, No answer,
wrong number etc.). It has different greeting options. Special greeting, wrong number announcement,
voice guided programming, Technical, features, Four ports, On side programmable Model &Technical
specification must be supported by catalogue and technical papers. The system has to able to provide
cellular/Mobile facility and user should be able to make call or receive the incoming call from local mobile
net-work. Catalogues/Technical papers should be attached.
TYPE AND FEATURE OF TELEPHONE SET:

A. EXECUTIVE SET/VIP SET:
The PABX system shall be provided with executive telephone set which can be directly operated by T&T
Line or Via PABX. The main feature of the executive telephone set will be as follows:
Set should be marked PABX brand, the telephone set should be single pair proprietary telephone set also
digital key telephone set. Speaker phone with volume control, at least auto dial/extension one touch call
keys, select key for auto dial, message key lamp, Redial keys, select key for auto dial, message key lamp,
programmable dialing, call forwarding setting key lamp, redial key.
Do not disturb conference key, password protection, Fully hand free calling, telephone set will support in
display of incoming/extension number/PABX Line monitoring. The executive set has compatible with the
PABX system quoted, old set will not be acceptable. Catalogue & technical papers must be attached and
model number also be mentioned.
B. NORMAL TELEPHONE SET:
Single Line telephone set with ringing tone adjustable switch and mute switch, Telephone sets must have
directly operated by T&T lines or in PABX. At least auto dial, select Key for auto dial, call forwarding key,
Re-dial key, telephone set will support in display of incoming extension Number through PABX rejection
of calls by pressing a key. This call can be transferred to any other extension or to the operator, old set
Page 175 of 194

will not be acceptable. Catalogue and Technical papers must be attached and Model Number also be
mentioned
Note:All luminaries, switches, sockets etc. shall be as specified in the schedule of item of work.
Specification for item of works not stated above shall strictly conform to specification/description of items
as per schedule of item of works.
4.22. INSPECTION AND TESTING
4.22.1. GENERAL
Every installation shall, on completion and before being energized, be inspected and tested in accordance
with the requirements of IEE Regulations 611 to 614 of Fifteenth Edition 1981 to verify, as far as
practicable, that the requirements of these Regulations have been met.
The methods of test shall be such that no danger to persons of property or damage to equipment can
occur even in the circuit tested is defective.
The cost of the test shall be deemed to be included in the item rates of the installation.
4.22.2. VISUAL INSPECTION
A visual inspection shall be made to verify that the installed electrical equipment is
 in compliance with the applicable British Standards of IEC or any other standard mentioned in the
specification.
 correctly selected and erected in accordance with these Regulations
 not visibly damaged so as to impair safety.
Note : Appendix 14 of IEE wiring regulation lists the principal features of an installation to be visually
inspected in order to verify compliance with the Regulations
4.22.3. TESTING
The following items, where relevant, shall be tested in the sequence indicated weather is not mentioning
in any part of the specification as installation and Sub-station and in addition to those test mentioned
elsewhere in the specification. Standard methods of testing, in respect of some of the test are given in
Appendix-15 of IEE wiring regulation, the use of other methods is not precluded provided that they give
no less effective results.
 Continuity of ring final circuit

 Continuity of protective conductors, including main and supplementary equipotential bonding
 Earth electrode resistance
 Insulation resistance
 Insulation of site-built assemblies
 Protection by electrical separation
 Protection by electrical separation
 Protection by barriers or enclosures provided during erection
 Insulation of non-conducting floors and walls
 Polarity
 Earth fault loop impedance
Page 176 of 194

 Earth continuity conductor

 Operation of residual current device
In the event of any test indicating failure to comply, that test and those preceding, the results of which
may have been influenced by the fault indicated, shall be repeated after the fault has been rectified
i. Continuity of Ring Final Circuit Conductors
A test shall be made to verify the continuity of all conductors (including the protective conductor) of every
ring final circuit.
ii. Continuity of Protective Conductors
Every protective conductor shall be separately tested to verify that it is electrically sound and correctly
connected. This test shall include all conductors and extraneous conductive parts used for equiptential
bonding.
iii. Earth Electrode Resistance
Where it is necessary to measure the resistance of an earth electrode the test method described in Item-
4 of Appendix-15 of IEE regulation, 15th Edition shall be used.
iv. Insulation Resistance
The tests described in regulations 613-6 to 613-8 shall be made before the installation is permanently
connected to the supply. For these tests installations may be divided into groups of outlets, each
containing not less than 50 outlets. For the purpose of this regulation the term ‘Outlet’ includes every
point and every switch except that a socket outlet, appliance or luminary incorporating a switch is
regarded as one outlet. A.D.C. Voltage not less than twice the nominal voltage of the circuit concerned
(r.m.s value for an A.C. supply) shall be applied for the measurement of insulation resistance, provided
that the test voltage need not exceed 500 V.D.C. for installations rated up to 500 or 1000 V.D.C. for
installations rated above 500 V up to 1000 V.
a. When measured with all fuse links in place, all switches (including, if practicable, the main
switch) closed and, except for TN-C systems, all poles or phases of the wiring electrically
connected together, the insulation resistance to Earth shall be not less than 1 mega ohm.
b. When measured between all the conductors connected to any one phase of pole of the supply
and, in turn, all conductors connected to each other phase or pole, the insulation resistance shall
be not less than 1 mega ohm. Wherever practicable, all lamps shall be removed and all current
using equipment shall be disconnected and all local switches controlling lamps or other
equipment shall be closed so that all parts of the wiring may be tested. Where the removal of
lamps and/or the disconnection of current-using equipment is impracticable, the local switches
controlling such lamps and/or equipment shall be open. Particular attention shall be given to the
presence of electronic devices connected in the installation and such devices shall be isolated
so that they are not damaged by the test voltage.
c. Where equipment is disconnected for the tests prescribed in regulation 613-7 and 613-7 and the
equipment has exposed conductive parts required by these regulation to be connected to
protective conductors, the insulation resistance between the exposed conductive parts and all
live parts of the equipment shall be measured separately and shall comply with the requirements
of the appropriate Brisith Standard for the equipment. If there is no appropriate British Standard
the insulation resistance shall be not less than 0.5 mega ohm.
Page 177 of 194

v. Insulation of Site-built
a. Where protection against direct contract is intended to be afforded by insulation applied to live
parts during erection in accordance with regulation 412-2, it shall be verified that the insulation
is capable of withstanding without breakdown or flash over, and applied voltage test equivalent
to that specified in the British Standard for similar factory built equipment.
b. Where protection against indirect contact is provided in supplementary insulation applied to

equipment during erection in accordance with regulations 413-18 to 413-26, it shall be verified
by test.
c. Test the insulating enclosure affords a degree of protection not less than IP2X (see BS 5490)
and that the insulating enclosure is capable of withstanding, without breakdown is capable of
withstanding, without breakdown or flashover an applied voltage test equivalent to that specified
in the British Standard for similar factory built equipment.
vi. Electrical Separation of Circuits
Where protection against electric hock is provided by safety extra-low voltage (Regulations 411-2 to 411-
10) or by electrical separation (Regulations 413-35 to 413-39( the electrical separation of the separated
circuits shall be inspected and/or tested.
Where the source of separated circuit is other than a safety isolating transformer complying with BS 3535
or a source independent of a higher voltage circuit, it shall be verified that source provides a degree of
safety equivalent to that of a BS 3535 safety isolating transformer, if necessary by performing the
applicable tests of insulation resistance and electric strength specified in BS 3535.
It shall also be verified that live parts of equipment of the separated circuit, other than cables, having a
degree of electrical separation from other circuits not less that between the input and output winding of
BS 3535 safety isolating transformer Regulations 411-6 and 413-37 (iv), if necessary by performing the
applicable tests of insulation resistance and electric strength specified in BS 3535.
For cables of separated circuits, Regulations 411-7 and 413-37 (iii) of IEE regulation 15th edition shall
be followed.
vii. Protection Against Direct Contract, by Barriers or Enclosures provided during Erection
Where protection against direct contract is intended to be afforded by barriers or enclosures provided
during erection in accordance with Regulations 412-3 to 412-6, it shall be verified by test that the
enclosures of barriers afford a degree of protection not less than IP2X or IP4X as appropriate, where
those regulations so require.
viii. Insulation of Non-conducting Floors and Walls
Where protection against indirect contract is to be provided by a non-conducting location intended to

comply with Regulations 413-27 to 413-31 and 471-19, the resistance of the floors and walls of the
location to the main protective conductor of the installation shall be measured at not less than three points
on each relevant surface, once of which shall be not less than 1 m and not more than 1.2 m from any
extraneous conductive part in the location. Any insulation or insulating arrangement of extraneous
conductive parts intended to satisfy Regulation 413-31 (a) item (iii) shall be able to withstand a test
Page 178 of 194

voltage of at least 2 KV and shall not pass a leakage curring exceeding 1 mA in normal conditions of
use.
ix. Polarity
A test of polarity shall be made and it shall be verified that all fuses and single pole control devices are
connected in the phase conductor only, that central contact bayonet and Edison-type screw lamp holders
in circuits having and earthed neutral conductor have their outer of screwed contact s connected to that
conductor, and that wiring has been correctly connected to socket outlets.
x. Earth Fault Loop Impedance
Where protective measures are used which required a knowledge of earth fault loop impedance, the
relevant impedance shall be measured or determined by an equally effective method.
xi. Earth Continuity Conductor
Earth continuity conductor of the entire earthing network shall be tested to verfy the earth continuity.
xii. Operation of Residual Current Operated Devices

Where protection against indirect contract is to be provided by a residual current device its effectiveness
shall be verified by a test simulating an appropriate fault condition and independent of any test facility
incorporated in the device.
4.22.4. CERTIFICATE
Following the inspection and testing required by this Article, a completion certificate shall be given by the
Contractor or other person responsible or by an authorized person acting on his behalf to the Owner. The
certificate shall be in the form set out in Appendix-16 of IEE Regulation 15th Edition or in any other suitable
form required by the Engineer-in-Charge/Consultant. Any defect or omission revealed by inspection or
test shall be made good before a completion certificate is issued.
Page 179 of 194

Page 180 of 194

ম নিনিমালা
(MEP),
(BNBC)
5.1.1.
5.1.2.
5.1.2.1. নিমাণঅিু
ম মমাদমিরনিয়মািলী
A3 A4
SOIL TEST
Page 183 of 194

FAR
A0 A4
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
Page 184 of 194

TERRACE
Page 185 of 194

LOFT ,
ELEVATIONS
Page 186 of 194

Page 187 of 194

STRUCTURAL DESIGN
Page 188 of 194

 ।
Page 189 of 194

Page 190 of 194

Page 191 of 194

5.1.3.
ক. িৃষ্টির পানি সংগ্রহ এিং ভূ -গভমস্থ পানি নরচার্ম (RAIN WATER HARVESTING
AND GROUND WATER RECHARGE)
GROUND COVERAGE
RECHARGE PIT
RECHARGE PIT
Page 192 of 194

RECHARGE PIT
খ. িৃক্ষ ররাপি (TREE PLANTATION)
িযিস্থাপিা(GARBAGE MANAGEMENT)
Page 193 of 194

ঘ. ওয়াটার নরসাইনলং(WATER RECYCLING)
নিদুযৎ (SOLAR POWER)
( FIRE FIGHTING LIFT ):

C, D1, E1, E3, E5, F3, G, H, H, J, K শ্রেণীভূ ক্ত
FIRE FIGHTING LIFT
Page 194 of 194


2020.01.13 Guide Line File - BHTC-2 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

2020.01.13 Guide Line File - BHTC-2 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

CONSTRUCTION GUIDE LINE

CHAPTER 01: GENERAL GUIDE LINE, MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS & SAFETY

CHAPTER 02: CIVIL WORKS ................................................................................... 59

CHAPTER 03: SANITARY, PLUMBING AND GAS LINE WORKS............................... 125

CHAPTER 04: ELECTRICAL WORKS ...................................................................... 147

CHAPTER 05: ইমারত নিমাণ

5.1.1. .................................................................. 183

5.1.2. ................ 183

5.1.3. ........................... 192

GENERAL GUIDE LINE, MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS & SAFETY SECURITY

 Step-2.Selection of contractors and signing of agreement

 Step-3. Implementation of construction activities:

GENERAL GUIDE LINE AND MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS

1.1. Location and Description of the Project

The project envisages Construction of any Building / Infrastructure project at anywhere in

1.2. Scope of Work under the Contract

1.4. Shop Drawings and As-built Drawings

1.5. Laboratory Test Results

1.6. Electrical, Mechanical, Sanitary and Plumbing

1.7. Examination and Acceptance

4.1. Before Starting the Work

4.2. During Execution of Work

4.3. After Completion of Work

5.2. Field Office and Installation

5.3. Sanitary Facilities

5.5. Drinking Water

5.6. Electric Power and Lighting

5.7. First Aid Centre

5.8. Fire Fighting Equipment

5.9. Protective Barrier and Hanging Platform

5.10. Police and health regulations

5.11. Lifts and Cranes

6. PROTECTION AND SAFETY

6.1. Measures to be Taken

6.2. Safety Manuals

7. MATERIALS, TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

7.3. Equal Products and Equivalents

7.4. Additional Costs Related to Substitutions

7.5. Failure of Equal Products

7.6. Equipment and Tools

8.1. Mobilization/Site Clearing/Temporary Facilities

8.2. Unfavorable Weather Condition

8.3. Dewatering Arrangements

8.4. Checking Site Measurement

8.5. Permanent Bench Marks

8.6. ReferenceLine Pillars

9. SAMPLES & TESTS

9.3. Additional Tests

9.4. Standard Specification

9.5. Works Test Rules

10. TEST TO BE PERFOMED

11. FINE AGGREGATES (SAND)

11.4. Particle Size

Grading Limits for Sands

4.75 mm 90-95 90-100 100 100 100

2.36 mm 70-90 90-100 100 100 100

1.18 mm 45-70 70-95 95-100 100 100

600 micron 25-45 45-85 85-95 95-100 100

300 micron 10-20 20-50 50-70 70-80 80-90

150 micron 0-2 0-2 20-35 35-40 40-60

Material passing No.2000 sieve 2.0

11.6. Supply and Stocking

12. COARSE AGGREGATES